diff options
| author | Jack Humbert <jack.humb@gmail.com> | 2017-07-07 17:55:23 +0200 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Jack Humbert <jack.humb@gmail.com> | 2017-07-07 17:55:23 +0200 |
| commit | 8655d4f4948b2deef7844503c8d690f23ac1a062 (patch) | |
| tree | b2c6effc9d6cd5b5b43933a1e53b8bf17e9e82cf /lib/lufa/Bootloaders | |
| parent | 1896c76a2928c96f9ab7947bec2ef8dd37623cff (diff) | |
| parent | 60b30c036397cb5627fa374bb930794b225daa29 (diff) | |
| download | qmk_firmware-8655d4f4948b2deef7844503c8d690f23ac1a062.tar.gz qmk_firmware-8655d4f4948b2deef7844503c8d690f23ac1a062.tar.xz | |
Merge commit '60b30c036397cb5627fa374bb930794b225daa29' as 'lib/lufa'
Diffstat (limited to 'lib/lufa/Bootloaders')
72 files changed, 23475 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2be156808 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Bootloader user application API functions. + */ + +#include "BootloaderAPI.h" + +void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_erase_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_write_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word) +{ + boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_signature_byte_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits) +{ + boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5169bbc3c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderAPI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void); + void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c60f84e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the +; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections) +.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax" +.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines +BootloaderAPI_Trampolines: + + BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage + BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage + BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord + BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature + BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse + BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock + BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5: + ret + + + +; API function jump table +.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax" +.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable +BootloaderAPI_JumpTable: + + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5 + + + +; Bootloader table signatures and information +.section .apitable_signatures, "ax" +.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures +BootloaderAPI_Signatures: + + .long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader + .word 0xDF00 ; Signature for the CDC class bootloader + .word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa17bc15b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,673 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C +#include "BootloaderCDC.h" + +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. This must be retained as some + * operating systems will not open the port unless the settings can be set successfully. + */ +static CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 0, + .CharFormat = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit, + .ParityType = CDC_PARITY_None, + .DataBits = 8 }; + +/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host, + * and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued + * command.) + */ +static uint32_t CurrAddress; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a watchdog reset. When cleared the bootloader will exit, starting the watchdog and entering an infinite + * loop until the AVR restarts and the application runs. + */ +static bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader + * will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held + * low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value + * \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start. + */ +uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT; + + +/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application + * start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid, + * this will force the user application to start via a software jump. + */ +void Application_Jump_Check(void) +{ + bool JumpToApplication = false; + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO) + /* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTC |= (1 << 7); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0); + + /* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */ + PORTC &= ~(1 << 7); + #elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + /* Disable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_DISABLE(); + + /* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTF |= (1 << 4); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0); + + /* Re-enable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_ENABLE(); + #else + /* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */ + if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST) + { + /* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */ + if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF); + } + else + { + /* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application; + * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */ + if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + } + #endif + + /* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */ + bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF); + + /* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */ + if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid) + { + /* Turn off the watchdog */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */ + MagicBootKey = 0; + + // cppcheck-suppress constStatement + ((void (*)(void))0x0000)(); + } +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start + * the loaded application code. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Turn on first LED on the board to indicate that the bootloader has started */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */ + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + while (RunBootloader) + { + CDC_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } + + /* Wait a short time to end all USB transactions and then disconnect */ + _delay_us(1000); + + /* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */ + USB_Detach(); + + /* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */ + MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY; + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */ +static void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize the USB and other board hardware drivers */ + USB_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */ + TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1); + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10)); +} + +/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */ +ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + /* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the CDC interface */ + if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) != + (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + return; + } + + /* Activity - toggle indicator LEDs */ + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest) + { + case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t)); + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + } + + break; + case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t)); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + } + + break; + case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + } +} + +#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT) +/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending + * on the AVR109 protocol command issued. + * + * \param[in] Command Single character AVR109 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform + */ +static void ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command) +{ + uint16_t BlockSize; + char MemoryType; + + uint8_t HighByte = 0; + uint8_t LowByte = 0; + + BlockSize = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8); + BlockSize |= FetchNextCommandByte(); + + MemoryType = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + if ((MemoryType != MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) && (MemoryType != MEMORY_TYPE_EEPROM)) + { + /* Send error byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('?'); + + return; + } + + /* Check if command is to read a memory block */ + if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead) + { + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + while (BlockSize--) + { + if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) + { + /* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(CurrAddress | HighByte)); + #else + WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte(CurrAddress | HighByte)); + #endif + + /* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */ + if (HighByte) + CurrAddress += 2; + + HighByte = !HighByte; + } + else + { + /* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */ + WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)(intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1))); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress += 2; + } + } + } + else + { + uint32_t PageStartAddress = CurrAddress; + + if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) + { + boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + while (BlockSize--) + { + if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) + { + /* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */ + if (HighByte) + { + /* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte)); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress += 2; + } + else + { + LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte(); + } + + HighByte = !HighByte; + } + else + { + /* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */ + eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress += 2; + } + } + + /* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */ + if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageStartAddress); + + /* Wait until write operation has completed */ + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Send response byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } +} +#endif + +/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed + * to allow reception of the next data packet from the host. + * + * \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint + */ +static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void) +{ + /* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR); + + /* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return 0; + } + } + + /* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */ + return Endpoint_Read_8(); +} + +/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the + * bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host. + * + * \param[in] Response Next response byte to send to the host + */ +static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response) +{ + /* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR); + + /* If IN endpoint full, clear it and wait until ready for the next packet to the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + } + + /* Write the next byte to the IN endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_8(Response); +} + +/** Task to read in AVR109 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions + * and send the appropriate response back to the host. + */ +static void CDC_Task(void) +{ + /* Select the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR); + + /* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + return; + + /* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */ + uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ExitBootloader) + { + RunBootloader = false; + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SetLED) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ClearLED) || + (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SelectDeviceType)) + { + FetchNextCommandByte(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_EnterProgrammingMode) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_LeaveProgrammingMode)) + { + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadPartCode) + { + /* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */ + WriteNextResponseByte(0x44); + WriteNextResponseByte(0x00); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadAutoAddressIncrement) + { + /* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */ + WriteNextResponseByte('Y'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SetCurrentAddress) + { + /* Set the current address to that given by the host (translate 16-bit word address to byte address) */ + CurrAddress = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 9); + CurrAddress |= (FetchNextCommandByte() << 1); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderInterface) + { + /* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('S'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderIdentifier) + { + /* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */ + for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++) + WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderSWVersion) + { + WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR); + WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadSignature) + { + WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_3); + WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_2); + WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_1); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_EraseFLASH) + { + /* Clear the application section of flash */ + for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE) + { + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + #if !defined(NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT) + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteLockbits) + { + /* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */ + boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + #endif + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLockbits) + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLowFuses) + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadHighFuses) + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadExtendedFuses) + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS)); + } + #if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT) + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_GetBlockWriteSupport) + { + WriteNextResponseByte('Y'); + + /* Send block size to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8); + WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF); + } + else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockWrite) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead)) + { + /* Delegate the block write/read to a separate function for clarity */ + ReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command); + } + #endif + #if !defined(NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT) + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordHigh) + { + /* Write the high byte to the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordLow) + { + /* Write the low byte to the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(CurrAddress | 0x01, FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address */ + CurrAddress += 2; + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteFlashPage) + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(CurrAddress); + + /* Wait until write operation has completed */ + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadFLASHWord) + { + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(CurrAddress); + #else + uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress); + #endif + + WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8); + WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF); + } + #endif + #if !defined(NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT) + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteEEPROM) + { + /* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */ + eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address after use */ + CurrAddress += 2; + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadEEPROM) + { + /* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */ + WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)))); + + /* Increment the address after use */ + CurrAddress += 2; + } + #endif + else if (Command != AVR109_COMMAND_Sync) + { + /* Unknown (non-sync) command, return fail code */ + WriteNextResponseByte('?'); + } + + /* Select the IN endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR); + + /* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */ + bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()); + + /* Send the endpoint data to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */ + if (IsEndpointFull) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + } + + /* Wait until the data has been sent to the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + /* Select the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR); + + /* Acknowledge the command from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6543aa73 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderCDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_H_ +#define _CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <avr/eeprom.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "BootloaderAPI.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__) + #error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested. */ + #define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER "LUFACDC" + + /** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */ + #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY 0xDC42 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Possible memory types that can be addressed via the bootloader. */ + enum AVR109_Memories + { + MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH = 'F', + MEMORY_TYPE_EEPROM = 'E', + }; + + /** Possible commands that can be issued to the bootloader. */ + enum AVR109_Commands + { + AVR109_COMMAND_Sync = 27, + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadEEPROM = 'd', + AVR109_COMMAND_WriteEEPROM = 'D', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadFLASHWord = 'R', + AVR109_COMMAND_WriteFlashPage = 'm', + AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordLow = 'c', + AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordHigh = 'C', + AVR109_COMMAND_GetBlockWriteSupport = 'b', + AVR109_COMMAND_BlockWrite = 'B', + AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead = 'g', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadExtendedFuses = 'Q', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadHighFuses = 'N', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLowFuses = 'F', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLockbits = 'r', + AVR109_COMMAND_WriteLockbits = 'l', + AVR109_COMMAND_EraseFLASH = 'e', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadSignature = 's', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderSWVersion = 'V', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderHWVersion = 'v', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderIdentifier = 'S', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderInterface = 'p', + AVR109_COMMAND_SetCurrentAddress = 'A', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadAutoAddressIncrement = 'a', + AVR109_COMMAND_ReadPartCode = 't', + AVR109_COMMAND_EnterProgrammingMode = 'P', + AVR109_COMMAND_LeaveProgrammingMode = 'L', + AVR109_COMMAND_SelectDeviceType = 'T', + AVR109_COMMAND_SetLED = 'x', + AVR109_COMMAND_ClearLED = 'y', + AVR109_COMMAND_ExitBootloader = 'E', + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */ + typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + static void CDC_Task(void); + static void SetupHardware(void); + + void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT) + static void ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command); + #endif + static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void); + static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8c349cde --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109 + * protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit + * into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to + * edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the + * bootloader from the normal user application. + * + * \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device + * lockbits are set. + * + * \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader + * + * On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of + * the AVR is grounded when the device is reset. + * + * The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses: + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from + * the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the + * device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily. + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software + * jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set). + * + * For board specific exceptions to the above, see below. + * + * \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board + * Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the + * \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board + * Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the + * \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation + * + * After running this bootloader for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF + * file located in this bootloader project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. + * This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the + * device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application + * + * This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, Atmel's AVRPROG, or other + * applications implementing the AVR109 protocol, which is documented on the Atmel website as an application + * note. + * + * \subsection SSec_AVRDude AVRDUDE (Windows, Mac, Linux) + * + * AVRDude is a free, cross-platform and open source command line programmer for Atmel and third party AVR + * programmers. It is available on the the Windows platform as part of the "WinAVR" package, or on other systems + * either from a build from the official source code, or in many distributions as a precompiled binary package. + * + * To load a new HEX file with AVRDude, specify "AVR109" as the programmer, with the allocated COM port. On Windows + * platforms this will be a COMx port name: + * \code + * avrdude -c AVR109 -p at90usb1287 -P COM0 -U flash:w:Mouse.hex + * \endcode + * + * On Linux systems, this will typically be a /dev/ttyACMx port name: + * \code + * avrdude -c AVR109 -p at90usb1287 -P /dev/ttyACM0 -U flash:w:Mouse.hex + * \endcode + * + * Refer to the AVRDude project documentation for additional usage instructions. + * + * \section Sec_API User Application API + * + * Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader, + * allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data. + * + * By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the + * following layout: + * + * \code + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE 32 + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE) + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index) (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2) + * + * void (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6); + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE 0xDCFB + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_CDC_SIGNATURE 0xDF00 + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH 4 + * \endcode + * + * From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address + * \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader + * can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them + * to the value \c BOOTLOADER_CDC_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH + * memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START. + * + * \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map + * The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader. + * + * \verbatim + * +----------------------------+ 0x0000 + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | User Application | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE + * | | + * | Bootloader Application | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96 + * | API Table Trampolines | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32 + * | Bootloader API Table | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8 + * | Bootloader ID Constants | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND + * \endverbatim + * + * \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues: + * + * \par On Linux machines, the CDC bootloader is unstable or inaccessible. + * A change to the \c ModemManager module in many Linux distributions causes + * this module to try to take control over inserted CDC devices, corrupting the + * datastream. A UDEV rule is required to prevent this. + * See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps. + * If the issue still persists then uninstall modemmanager by executing <tt>sudo apt-get remove modemmanager</tt>, or + * the equivalent using your chosen distribution's package manager. + * + * \par On Linux machines, the CDC bootloader is inaccessible. + * On many Linux systems, non-root users do not have automatic access to newly + * inserted CDC devices. Root privileges or a UDEV rule is required to gain + * access. + * See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to disable memory block read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all reads and writes to be made + * using the byte-level commands.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to disable EEPROM memory byte read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all EEPROM reads and writes + * to be made using the block-level commands.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to disable FLASH memory byte read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all FLASH reads and writes + * to be made using the block-level commands.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to disable lock byte write support in the bootloader, preventing the lock bits from being set programmatically.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22972b72f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure LUFA's + * compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time + * constants supplied through a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + +// #define NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT +// #define NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT +// #define NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT +// #define NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5aa0e765b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS + #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..627657037 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x204A, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = 0x00, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = 0x02, + + .Capabilities = 0x02, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = 0x06, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see LUFA library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Language) + { + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Manufacturer) + { + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = ManufacturerString.Header.Size; + } + else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Product) + { + Address = &ProductString; + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6fbf5262 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x97 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x96 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x97 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x96 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x95 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x87 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x94 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x88 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x95 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x8A + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x94 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x89 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x94 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x93 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x89 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x93 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #else + #error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + /** Endpoint address for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Control Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..61624c731 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation +;************************************************************ + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[SourceDisksNames] + +[SourceDisksFiles] + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[DriverInstall] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg + +[DriverInstall.Services] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst + +[DriverInstall.AddReg] +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC Class Bootloader" diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72f3ff04c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="CDC Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_128kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="CDC Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_64kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="CDC Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_32kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="CDC Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_16kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="CDC Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_8kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc" caption="CDC Bootloader">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ CDC Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device using avrdude or other AVR109 protocol compliant software when plugged into a host.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="."/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderCDC.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderCDC.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+ <build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderCDC.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..414693479 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM \ + ATTR_NO_INIT + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa5a2117d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = BootloaderCDC +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) +LD_FLAGS = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS) + +# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must +# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the +# device's fuses. +FLASH_SIZE_KB = 128 +BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = 8 + +# Bootloader address calculation formulas +# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above. +CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) ) +BOOT_START_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 ) +BOOT_SEC_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) ) + +# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to +# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited. +BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2)) +BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96) +BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable, BootloaderAPI_JumpTable, 32) +BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures, BootloaderAPI_Signatures, 8) + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..491c506d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Bootloader user application API functions. + */ + +#include "BootloaderAPI.h" + +void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_erase_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_write_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word) +{ + boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_signature_byte_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits) +{ + boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5169bbc3c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderAPI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void); + void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95fd8e5c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the +; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections) +.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax" +.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines +BootloaderAPI_Trampolines: + + BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage + BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage + BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord + BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature + BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse + BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock + BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline: + jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4: + ret + BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5: + ret + + + +; API function jump table +.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax" +.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable +BootloaderAPI_JumpTable: + + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4 + rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5 + + + +; Bootloader table signatures and information +.section .apitable_signatures, "ax" +.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures +BootloaderAPI_Signatures: + + .long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader + .word 0xDF10 ; Signature for the DFU class bootloader, V1 + .word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..928cf6fe3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c @@ -0,0 +1,891 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C +#include "BootloaderDFU.h" + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations + * other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader + * once a memory erase has completed in a bootloader session. + */ +static bool IsSecure = SECURE_MODE; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host). + */ +static bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and + * jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly + * acknowledged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set, + * causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down. + */ +static bool WaitForExit = false; + +/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */ +static uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + +/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after + * each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued. + */ +static uint8_t DFU_Status = OK; + +/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */ +static DFU_Command_t SentCommand; + +/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command + * requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command + * is issued by the host. + */ +static uint8_t ResponseByte; + +/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host + * may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command. + */ +static AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000; + +/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than + * 64KB of flash memory. + */ +static uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0; + +/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM + * depending on the issued command from the host). + */ +static uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000; + +/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read from/write to in the memory being addressed (either FLASH + * of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host). + */ +static uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000; + +/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader + * will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held + * low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value + * \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start. + */ +uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT; + + +/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application + * start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid, + * this will force the user application to start via a software jump. + */ +void Application_Jump_Check(void) +{ + bool JumpToApplication = false; + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO) + /* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTC |= (1 << 7); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0); + + /* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */ + PORTC &= ~(1 << 7); + #elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + /* Disable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_DISABLE(); + + /* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTF |= (1 << 4); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0); + + /* Re-enable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_ENABLE(); + #else + /* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */ + if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST) + { + /* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */ + //if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + // JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF); + } + else + { + /* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application; + * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */ + //if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + // JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + } + #endif + + /* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */ + bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF); + + /* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */ + if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid) + { + /* Turn off the watchdog */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */ + MagicBootKey = 0; + + // cppcheck-suppress constStatement + ((void (*)(void))0x0000)(); + } +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start + * the loaded application code. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Configure hardware required by the bootloader */ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Turn on first LED on the board to indicate that the bootloader has started */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + + /* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */ + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK) + uint16_t keypress = 0; + #endif + + /* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */ + while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit) { + USB_USBTask(); + #if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK) + bool pressed = (PIN(QMK_ESC_ROW) & NUM(QMK_ESC_ROW)); + if ((DFU_State == dfuIDLE) && (keypress > 5000) && pressed) { + break; + } + if (pressed) { + keypress++; + } else { + keypress = 0; + } + + #endif + } + + /* Reset configured hardware back to their original states for the user application */ + ResetHardware(); + + /* Start the user application */ + AppStartPtr(); +} + +/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */ +static void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK) + // column setup + DDR(QMK_ESC_COL) |= NUM(QMK_ESC_COL); + PORT(QMK_ESC_COL) |= NUM(QMK_ESC_COL); + + // row setup + DDR(QMK_ESC_ROW) |= NUM(QMK_ESC_ROW); + #endif + + /* Initialize the USB and other board hardware drivers */ + USB_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */ + TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1); + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10)); + +} + +/** Resets all configured hardware required for the bootloader back to their original states. */ +static void ResetHardware(void) +{ + /* Shut down the USB and other board hardware drivers */ + USB_Disable(); + LEDs_Disable(); + + /* Disable Bootloader active LED toggle timer */ + TIMSK1 = 0; + TCCR1B = 0; + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = 0; + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK) + DDR(QMK_ESC_COL) = PORT(QMK_ESC_COL) = DDR(QMK_ESC_ROW) = PORT(QMK_ESC_ROW) = 0; + #endif +} + +/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */ +ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + /* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the DFU interface */ + if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) != + (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + return; + } + + /* Activity - toggle indicator LEDs */ + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + + /* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */ + SentCommand.DataSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength; + + switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest) + { + case DFU_REQ_DNLOAD: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */ + if (WaitForExit) + { + /* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */ + ProcessBootloaderCommand(); + + /* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */ + WaitForExit = false; + } + + /* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */ + if (SentCommand.DataSize) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + /* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */ + SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_8(); + + /* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */ + SentCommand.DataSize--; + + /* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */ + for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) && + Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++) + { + SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_8(); + SentCommand.DataSize--; + } + + /* Process the command */ + ProcessBootloaderCommand(); + } + + /* Check if currently downloading firmware */ + if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE) + { + if (!(SentCommand.DataSize)) + { + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + } + else + { + /* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */ + DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE); + + /* Throw away the packet alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */ + DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE); + + /* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */ + uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1); + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Write flash + { + /* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */ + uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1); + + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long; + uint8_t WordsInFlashPage = 0; + + while (WordsRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + } + + /* Write the next word into the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_16_LE()); + + /* Adjust counters */ + WordsInFlashPage += 1; + CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2; + + /* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */ + if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining)) + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Check if programming incomplete */ + if (WordsRemaining) + { + CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long; + WordsInFlashPage = 0; + + /* Erase next page's temp buffer */ + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + } + } + + /* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */ + StartAddr = EndAddr; + + /* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + else // Write EEPROM + { + while (BytesRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + } + + /* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */ + eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_8()); + + /* Adjust counters */ + StartAddr++; + } + } + + /* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */ + DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE); + } + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + + break; + case DFU_REQ_UPLOAD: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE) + { + if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank Check + { + /* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host + that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */ + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(StartAddr); + } + else + { + /* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */ + Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseByte); + } + } + else + { + /* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */ + uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1); + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read FLASH + { + /* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */ + uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1); + + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + while (WordsRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + } + + /* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long)); + #else + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long)); + #endif + + /* Adjust counters */ + CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2; + } + + /* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */ + StartAddr = EndAddr; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM + { + while (BytesRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + } + + /* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr)); + + /* Adjust counters */ + StartAddr++; + } + } + + /* Return to idle state */ + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + } + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + case DFU_REQ_GETSTATUS: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + /* Write 8-bit status value */ + Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_Status); + + /* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */ + Endpoint_Write_8(0); + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0); + + /* Write 8-bit state value */ + Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_State); + + /* Write 8-bit state string ID number */ + Endpoint_Write_8(0); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + case DFU_REQ_CLRSTATUS: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */ + DFU_Status = OK; + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + case DFU_REQ_GETSTATE: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + /* Write the current device state to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_State); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + case DFU_REQ_ABORT: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */ + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + } +} + +/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to + * discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix. + * + * \param[in] NumberOfBytes Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint + */ +static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes) +{ + while (NumberOfBytes--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Wait until next data packet received */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + } + else + { + Endpoint_Discard_8(); + } + } +} + +/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures + * that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the + * appropriate handler function. + */ +static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void) +{ + /* Check if device is in secure mode */ + if (IsSecure) + { + /* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */ + if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE) && + IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) || + (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ))) + { + /* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errWRITE; + + /* Stall command */ + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + /* Don't process the command */ + return; + } + } + + /* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */ + switch (SentCommand.Command) + { + case COMMAND_PROG_START: + ProcessMemProgCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_DISP_DATA: + ProcessMemReadCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_WRITE: + ProcessWriteCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_READ: + ProcessReadCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR: + if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00)) // Set 64KB flash page command + Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2]; + + break; + } +} + +/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them + * in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables. + */ +static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void) +{ + union + { + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + uint16_t Word; + } Address[2] = {{.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}}, + {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}}; + + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */ + StartAddr = Address[0].Word; + EndAddr = Address[1].Word; +} + +/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed + * to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory. + */ +static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Write FLASH command + IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Write EEPROM command + { + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses */ + LoadStartEndAddresses(); + + /* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) + { + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + /* Erase the current page's temp buffer */ + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */ + DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE; + } +} + +/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed + * to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory + * blank check command. + */ +static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Read FLASH command + IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM command + { + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses */ + LoadStartEndAddresses(); + + /* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */ + DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank check FLASH command + { + uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; + + while (CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + /* Check if the current byte is not blank */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF) + #else + if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF) + #endif + { + /* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */ + Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16); + StartAddr = CurrFlashAddress; + + /* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED; + + break; + } + + CurrFlashAddress++; + } + } +} + +/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as + * bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure. + */ +static void ProcessWriteCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03)) // Start application + { + /* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */ + WaitForExit = true; + + /* Check if data supplied for the Start Program command - no data executes the program */ + if (SentCommand.DataSize) + { + if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x01) // Start via jump + { + union + { + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + AppPtr_t FuncPtr; + } Address = {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}; + + /* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */ + AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr; + } + } + else + { + if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00) // Start via watchdog + { + /* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */ + MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY; + + /* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + } + else // Start via jump + { + /* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity if a valid application has been loaded */ + if (pgm_read_word_near(0) == 0xFFFF) + RunBootloader = false; + } + } + } + else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) // Erase flash + { + uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; + + /* Clear the application section of flash */ + while (CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE; + } + + /* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + /* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */ + IsSecure = false; + } +} + +/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval + * commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval. + */ +static void ProcessReadCommand(void) +{ + const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2}; + const uint8_t SignatureInfo[4] = {0x58, AVR_SIGNATURE_1, AVR_SIGNATURE_2, AVR_SIGNATURE_3}; + + uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1]; + bool ReadAddressInvalid = false; + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read bootloader info + { + if (DataIndexToRead < 3) + ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead]; + else + ReadAddressInvalid = true; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Read signature byte + { + switch (DataIndexToRead) + { + case 0x30: + ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[0]; + break; + case 0x31: + ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[1]; + break; + case 0x60: + ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[2]; + break; + case 0x61: + ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[3]; + break; + default: + ReadAddressInvalid = true; + break; + } + } + + if (ReadAddressInvalid) + { + /* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errADDRESS; + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a97ba6c7e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h @@ -0,0 +1,216 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderDFU.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/eeprom.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <util/delay.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "BootloaderAPI.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__) + #error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** Major bootloader version number. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2 + + /** Minor bootloader version number. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV 0 + + /** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */ + #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY 0xDC42 + + /** Complete bootloader version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the + * two individual bootloader version macros. + */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV) + + /** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1 0xDC + + /** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2 0xFB + + /** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command. + * + * \param[in] dataarr Command byte array to check against + * \param[in] cb1 First command byte to check + */ + #define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1) (dataarr[0] == (cb1)) + + /** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command. + * + * \param[in] dataarr Command byte array to check against + * \param[in] cb1 First command byte to check + * \param[in] cb2 Second command byte to check + */ + #define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == (cb1)) && (dataarr[1] == (cb2))) + + /** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command. + * The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as + * a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded. + */ + #define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE 16 + + /** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command. + * Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded. + */ + #define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE 26 + + /** DFU class command request to detach from the host. */ + #define DFU_REQ_DETATCH 0x00 + + /** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_REQ_DNLOAD 0x01 + + /** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */ + #define DFU_REQ_UPLOAD 0x02 + + /** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_REQ_GETSTATUS 0x03 + + /** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */ + #define DFU_REQ_CLRSTATUS 0x04 + + /** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_REQ_GETSTATE 0x05 + + /** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */ + #define DFU_REQ_ABORT 0x06 + + /** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */ + #define COMMAND_PROG_START 0x01 + + /** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */ + #define COMMAND_DISP_DATA 0x03 + + /** DFU command to issue a write command. */ + #define COMMAND_WRITE 0x04 + + /** DFU command to issue a read command. */ + #define COMMAND_READ 0x05 + + /** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page + * that subsequent flash operations should use. */ + #define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */ + typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + + /** Type define for a structure containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the \c COMMAND_* macro values */ + uint8_t Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */ + uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */ + } DFU_Command_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */ + enum DFU_State_t + { + appIDLE = 0, + appDETACH = 1, + dfuIDLE = 2, + dfuDNLOAD_SYNC = 3, + dfuDNBUSY = 4, + dfuDNLOAD_IDLE = 5, + dfuMANIFEST_SYNC = 6, + dfuMANIFEST = 7, + dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET = 8, + dfuUPLOAD_IDLE = 9, + dfuERROR = 10 + }; + + /** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */ + enum DFU_Status_t + { + OK = 0, + errTARGET = 1, + errFILE = 2, + errWRITE = 3, + errERASE = 4, + errCHECK_ERASED = 5, + errPROG = 6, + errVERIFY = 7, + errADDRESS = 8, + errNOTDONE = 9, + errFIRMWARE = 10, + errVENDOR = 11, + errUSBR = 12, + errPOR = 13, + errUNKNOWN = 14, + errSTALLEDPKT = 15 + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + static void SetupHardware(void); + static void ResetHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C) + static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes); + static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void); + static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void); + static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void); + static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void); + static void ProcessWriteCommand(void); + static void ProcessReadCommand(void); + #endif + + void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2540a5b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt @@ -0,0 +1,235 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i> + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i> + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>None</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode \n + * Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming + * software to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit + * into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to + * edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the + * bootloader from the normal user application. + * + * \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader + * + * On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of + * the AVR is grounded when the device is reset. + * + * The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses: + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from + * the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the + * device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily. + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software + * jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set). + * + * For board specific exceptions to the above, see below. + * + * \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board + * Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the + * \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board + * Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the + * \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation + * + * This bootloader is designed to be compatible with Atmel's provided Windows DFU class drivers. You will need to + * install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader on Windows platforms. If you are using a 64 bit Windows + * OS, you will need to either disable the driver signing requirement (see online tutorials for details) or use a + * digitally signed version of the official Atmel driver provided by a third party AVR user at + * <a>http://www.avrfreaks.net/index.php?module=Freaks%20Academy&func=viewItem&item_id=2196&item_type=project</a>. + * + * \note This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader + * drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please + * manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly. + * + * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application + * + * This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP utility on Windows machines, and dfu-programmer on Linux machines. + * + * \subsection SSec_FLIP FLIP (Windows) + * + * FLIP (Flexible In-System Programmer) is a utility written by Atmel, and distributed for free on the Atmel website. + * The FLIP utility is designed to assist in the bootloader programming of a range of Atmel devices, through several + * popular physical interfaces including USB. It is written in Java, however makes use of native extensions for USB + * support and thus is only offered on Windows. + * + * To program a device using FLIP, refer to the Atmel FLIP documentation. + * + * \subsection SSec_DFUProgrammer dfu-programmer (Linux) + * + * dfu-programmer is an open-source command line solution for the bootloader programming of Atmel devices through a + * USB connection, using the DFU protocol, available for download at <a>http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/</a>. + * + * The following example loads a HEX file into the AVR's FLASH memory using dfu-programmer: + * \code + * dfu-programmer at90usb1287 erase flash Mouse.hex + * \endcode + * + * \section Sec_API User Application API + * + * Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader, + * allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data. + * + * \warning The APIs exposed by the DFU class bootloader are \b NOT compatible with the API exposed by the official Atmel DFU bootloader. + * + * By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the + * following layout: + * + * \code + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE 32 + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE) + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index) (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2) + * + * void (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6); + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE 0xDCFB + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_DFU_SIGNATURE 0xDF10 + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH 4 + * \endcode + * + * From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address + * \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader + * can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them + * to the value \c BOOTLOADER_DFU_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH + * memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START. + * + * \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map + * The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader. + * + * \verbatim + * +----------------------------+ 0x0000 + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | User Application | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE + * | Booloader Start Trampoline | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - (BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE - 4) + * | | + * | Auxillery Bootloader | + * | Space for Smaller Devices | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE + * | | + * | Bootloader Application | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96 + * | API Table Trampolines | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32 + * | Bootloader API Table | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8 + * | Bootloader ID Constants | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND + * \endverbatim + * + * \subsection SSec_Aux_Space Auxiliary Bootloader Section + * To make the bootloader function on smaller devices (those with a physical + * bootloader section of smaller than 6KB) + * + * \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues: + * + * \par On Linux machines, the DFU bootloader is inaccessible. + * On many Linux systems, non-root users do not have automatic access to newly + * inserted DFU devices. Root privileges or a UDEV rule is required to gain + * access. + * See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>SECURE_MODE</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>If defined to \c true, the bootloader will not accept any memory commands other than a chip erase on start-up, until an + * erase has been performed. This can be used in conjunction with the AVR's lockbits to prevent the AVRs firmware from + * being dumped by unauthorized persons. When false, all memory operations are allowed at any time.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3acf33c7e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define SECURE_MODE false + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59ae519e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS + #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 32 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 + #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b7b6d490 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = PRODUCT_ID_CODE, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,0), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .DFU_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_DFU, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 0, + + .Class = 0xFE, + .SubClass = 0x01, + .Protocol = 0x02, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .DFU_Functional = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t), .Type = DTYPE_DFUFunctional}, + + .Attributes = (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD), + + .DetachTimeout = 0x0000, + .TransferSize = 0x0C00, + + .DFUSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0) + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"QMK"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"KB"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Language) + { + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Manufacturer) + { + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = ManufacturerString.Header.Size; + } + else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Product) + { + Address = &ProductString; + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5487f88f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_DFUFunctional 0x21 + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH + * command is issued, rather than the host issuing a USB Reset. + */ + #define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH (1 << 3) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manifestation phase + * (memory programming phase). + */ + #define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT (1 << 2) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from + * the device to the host. + */ + #define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD (1 << 1) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from + * the host to the device. + */ + #define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD (1 << 0) + + #if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x97 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x96 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x97 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x96 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF4 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x95 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x87 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF3 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x94 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x88 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF0 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x95 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x8A + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FEF + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x94 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x89 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFA + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x94 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FEE + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x93 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x89 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF7 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_1 0x1E + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_2 0x93 + #define AVR_SIGNATURE_3 0x82 + #else + #error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + #if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE) + #error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information + * to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the + * ATTR_* macros listed in this source file + */ + uint16_t DetachTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH + * command being issued and the device detaching + * from the USB bus + */ + uint16_t TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept + * from the host in a transaction + */ + uint16_t DFUSpecification; /**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU + * device complies with + */ + } USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // DFU Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DFU_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t DFU_Functional; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_DFU = 0, /**< DFU interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f3312b76 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="DFU Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_128kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="DFU Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_64kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="DFU Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_32kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="DFU Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_16kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="DFU Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_8kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu" caption="DFU Bootloader">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ DFU Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device using the Atmel FLIP or other AVR DFU programming software when plugged into a host.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="."/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderDFU.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderDFU.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+ <build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderDFU.txt"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbb03d6fa --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM \ + ATTR_NO_INIT + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d2014015 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = atmega32u4 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = QMK +F_CPU = 16000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = BootloaderDFU +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) +LD_FLAGS = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS) + +# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must +# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the +# device's fuses. +FLASH_SIZE_KB = 32 +BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = 4 + +# Bootloader address calculation formulas +# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above. +CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) ) +BOOT_START_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 ) +BOOT_SEC_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) ) + +# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to +# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited. +BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2)) +BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96) +BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable, BootloaderAPI_JumpTable, 32) +BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures, BootloaderAPI_Signatures, 8) + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa1dd5873 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the HID class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#include "BootloaderHID.h" + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * started via a forced watchdog reset. + */ +static bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader + * will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held + * low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value + * \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start. + */ +uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT; + + +/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application + * start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid, + * this will force the user application to start via a software jump. + */ +void Application_Jump_Check(void) +{ + /* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */ + if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + { + /* Turn off the watchdog */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */ + MagicBootKey = 0; + + // cppcheck-suppress constStatement + ((void (*)(void))0x0000)(); + } +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */ + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + while (RunBootloader) + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */ + USB_Detach(); + + /* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */ + MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY; + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */ +static void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize USB subsystem */ + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + /* Setup HID Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, HID_IN_EPSIZE, 1); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + /* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the HID interface */ + if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) != + (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + return; + } + + /* Process HID specific control requests */ + switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest) + { + case HID_REQ_SetReport: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the write destination address */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + uint32_t PageAddress = ((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() << 8); + #else + uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_16_LE(); + #endif + + /* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + if ((uint16_t)(PageAddress >> 8) == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION) + #else + if (PageAddress == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION) + #endif + { + RunBootloader = false; + } + else if (PageAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + /* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */ + boot_page_erase(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */ + for (uint8_t PageWord = 0; PageWord < (SPM_PAGESIZE / 2); PageWord++) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(PageAddress + ((uint16_t)PageWord << 1), Endpoint_Read_16_LE()); + } + + /* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62ee07de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderHID.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADERHID_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADERHID_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__) + #error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** Bootloader special address to start the user application */ + #define COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION 0xFFFF + + /** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */ + #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY 0xDC42 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + static void SetupHardware(void); + + void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e340703c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage HID Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n + * Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode \n + * Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for device FLASH programming through + * the supplied command line software, which is a modified version of Paul's TeensyHID Command Line loader code + * from PJRC (used with permission). This bootloader is deliberately non-compatible with the proprietary PJRC + * HalfKay bootloader GUI; only the command line interface software accompanying this bootloader will work with it. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit + * into 2KB of bootloader space for the Series 2 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU2, AT90USBxx2) or 4KB of bootloader space for + * all other models. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the MCU, + * FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device + * lockbits are set. + * + * \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader + * + * This bootloader is designed to be started via the \c HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the \c HWB pin (see device + * datasheet) then momentarily ground \c /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is set and the + * \c BOOTRST fuse is cleared. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation + * + * This bootloader uses the HID class driver inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional drivers + * need to be supplied for correct operation. + * + * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application + * + * Due to licensing issues, the supplied bootloader is compatible with the HalfKay bootloader protocol designed + * by PJRC, but is <b>not compatible with the cross-platform loader GUI</b>. A modified version of the open source + * cross-platform TeensyLoader application is supplied, which can be compiled under most operating systems. The + * command-line loader application should remain compatible with genuine Teensy boards in addition to boards using + * this custom bootloader. + * + * Once compiled, programs can be loaded into the AVR's FLASH memory through the following example command: + * \code + * hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=at90usb1287 Mouse.hex + * \endcode + * + * \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues: + * + * \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup. + * Some USB AVR boards ship with the \c BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader + * to run automatically when the device is reset. This booloader requires the + * \c BOOTRST be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader + * when needed. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5aa0e765b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS + #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..854ae1b63 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] = +{ + HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, 0xFFDC), /* Vendor Page 0xDC */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xFB), /* Vendor Usage 0xFB */ + HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Vendor Usage 2 */ + HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00), + HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF), + HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08), + HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(16, (sizeof(uint16_t) + SPM_PAGESIZE)), + HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE), + HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0), +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2067, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + .ProductStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .HID_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID, + .AlternateSetting = 0x00, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = HID_CSCP_HIDClass, + .SubClass = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass, + .Protocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .HID_VendorHID = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID}, + + .HIDSpec = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1), + .CountryCode = 0x00, + .TotalReportDescriptors = 1, + .HIDReportType = HID_DTYPE_Report, + .HIDReportLength = sizeof(HIDReport) + }, + + .HID_ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = HID_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = HID_IN_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + /* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */ + if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device) + { + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + } + else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration) + { + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + } + else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_HID) + { + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID; + Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t); + } + else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_Report) + { + Address = &HIDReport; + Size = sizeof(HIDReport); + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5516b1635 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Generic HID Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t HID_Interface; + USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t HID_VendorHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HID_ReportINEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID = 0, /**< GenericHID interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the HID data IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1) + + /** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_IN_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/.gitignore b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e73d1ec5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/.gitignore @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +hid_bootloader_cli diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7d6458a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +OS ?= LINUX +#OS ?= WINDOWS +#OS ?= MACOSX +#OS ?= BSD + +ifeq ($(OS), LINUX) # also works on FreeBSD +CC ?= gcc +CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall +hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_LIBUSB -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c -lusb + + +else ifeq ($(OS), WINDOWS) +CC = i586-mingw32msvc-gcc +CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall +LDLIB = -lsetupapi -lhid +hid_bootloader_cli.exe: hid_bootloader_cli.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_WIN32 -o hid_bootloader_cli.exe hid_bootloader_cli.c $(LDLIB) + + +else ifeq ($(OS), MACOSX) +CC ?= gcc +SDK ?= /Developer/SDKs/MacOSX10.5.sdk +CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall +hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -DUSE_APPLE_IOKIT -isysroot $(SDK) -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c -Wl,-syslibroot,$(SDK) -framework IOKit -framework CoreFoundation + + +else ifeq ($(OS), BSD) # works on NetBSD and OpenBSD +CC ?= gcct +CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall +hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_UHID -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c + + +endif + + +clean: + rm -f hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.exe diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a15a66405 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +OS ?= FreeBSD +#OS ?= NetBSD +#OS ?= OpenBSD + +CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall +CC ?= gcc + +.if $(OS) == "FreeBSD" +CFLAGS += -DUSE_LIBUSB +LIBS = -lusb +.elif $(OS) == "NetBSD" || $(OS) == "OpenBSD" +CFLAGS += -DUSE_UHID +LIBS = +.endif + + +hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c $(LIBS) + +clean: + rm -f hid_bootloader_cli diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94a9ed024 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt @@ -0,0 +1,674 @@ + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + + Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for +software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed +to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, +the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to +share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free +software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the +GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to +any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you +want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new +free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you +these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have +certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if +you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same +freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive +or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they +know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: +(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License +giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains +that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and +authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as +changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to +authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run +modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer +can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of +protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic +pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to +use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we +have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those +products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we +stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions +of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. +States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of +software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to +avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could +make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that +patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + 0. Definitions. + + "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of +works, such as semiconductor masks. + + "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this +License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and +"recipients" may be individuals or organizations. + + To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work +in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an +exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the +earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. + + A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based +on the Program. + + To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without +permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for +infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a +computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, +distribution (with or without modification), making available to the +public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other +parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through +a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" +to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible +feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) +tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the +extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the +work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If +the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a +menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + 1. Source Code. + + The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work +for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source +form of a work. + + A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official +standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of +interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that +is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other +than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of +packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major +Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that +Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an +implementation is available to the public in source code form. A +"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component +(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system +(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to +produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all +the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable +work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to +control those activities. However, it does not include the work's +System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free +programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but +which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source +includes interface definition files associated with source files for +the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically +linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, +such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those +subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users +can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding +Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that +same work. + + 2. Basic Permissions. + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of +copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated +conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited +permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a +covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its +content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your +rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not +convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains +in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose +of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you +with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with +the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do +not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works +for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction +and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of +your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under +the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 +makes it unnecessary. + + 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological +measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article +11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or +similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such +measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid +circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention +is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to +the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or +modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's +users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of +technological measures. + + 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you +receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and +appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; +keep intact all notices stating that this License and any +non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; +keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all +recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, +and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + + 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to +produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the +terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified + it, and giving a relevant date. + + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is + released under this License and any conditions added under section + 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to + "keep intact all notices". + + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this + License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This + License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 + additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, + regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no + permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not + invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display + Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive + interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your + work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent +works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, +and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, +in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an +"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not +used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users +beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work +in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other +parts of the aggregate. + + 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms +of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the +machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, +in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product + (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the + Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium + customarily used for software interchange. + + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product + (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a + written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as + long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product + model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a + copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the + product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical + medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no + more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this + conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the + Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the + written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This + alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and + only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord + with subsection 6b. + + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated + place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the + Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no + further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the + Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to + copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source + may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) + that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain + clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the + Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the + Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is + available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided + you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding + Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no + charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded +from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be +included in conveying the object code work. + + A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any +tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, +or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation +into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, +doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular +product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a +typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status +of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user +actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product +is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial +commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent +the only significant mode of use of the product. + + "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, +procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install +and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from +a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must +suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object +code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because +modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or +specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as +part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the +User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a +fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the +Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied +by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply +if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install +modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has +been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a +requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates +for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for +the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a +network may be denied when the modification itself materially and +adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and +protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, +in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly +documented (and with an implementation available to the public in +source code form), and must require no special password or key for +unpacking, reading or copying. + + 7. Additional Terms. + + "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this +License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. +Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall +be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent +that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions +apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately +under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by +this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option +remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of +it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own +removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place +additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, +for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you +add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of +that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the + terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or + author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal + Notices displayed by works containing it; or + + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or + requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in + reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or + authors of the material; or + + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some + trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that + material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of + it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for + any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on + those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further +restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you +received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is +governed by this License along with a term that is a further +restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains +a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this +License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms +of that license document, provided that the further restriction does +not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you +must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the +additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating +where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the +form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; +the above requirements apply either way. + + 8. Termination. + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly +provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or +modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under +this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third +paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your +license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) +provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and +finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright +holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means +prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is +reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the +violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have +received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that +copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after +your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the +licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under +this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently +reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same +material under section 10. + + 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or +run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work +occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission +to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, +nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or +modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do +not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a +covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + + 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically +receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and +propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible +for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an +organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an +organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered +work results from an entity transaction, each party to that +transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever +licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could +give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the +Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if +the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the +rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may +not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of +rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation +(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that +any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for +sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + + 11. Patents. + + A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this +License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The +work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". + + A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims +owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or +hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted +by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, +but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a +consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For +purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant +patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of +this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free +patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to +make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and +propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express +agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent +(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to +sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a +party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a +patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, +and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone +to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a +publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, +then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so +available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the +patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner +consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent +license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have +actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the +covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work +in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that +country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or +arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a +covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties +receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify +or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license +you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered +work and works based on it. + + A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within +the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is +conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are +specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered +work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is +in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment +to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying +the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the +parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory +patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work +conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily +for and in connection with specific products or compilations that +contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, +or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting +any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may +otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + + 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a +covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may +not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you +to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey +the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this +License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + + 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have +permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed +under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single +combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this +License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, +but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, +section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the +combination as such. + + 14. Revised Versions of this License. + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of +the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the +Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General +Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the +option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered +version or of any later version published by the Free Software +Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the +GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published +by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future +versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's +public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you +to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different +permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any +author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a +later version. + + 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY +APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT +HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY +OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, +THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR +PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM +IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF +ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 16. Limitation of Liability. + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS +THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY +GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE +USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF +DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD +PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), +EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF +SUCH DAMAGES. + + 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided +above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, +reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates +an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the +Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a +copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short +notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands +might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, +if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. +For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see +<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program +into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you +may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with +the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General +Public License instead of this License. But first, please read +<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b54f943b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c @@ -0,0 +1,1013 @@ +/* Modified for the LUFA HID Bootloader by Dean Camera + * http://www.lufa-lib.org + * + * THIS MODIFIED VERSION IS UNSUPPORTED BY PJRC. + */ + +/* Teensy Loader, Command Line Interface + * Program and Reboot Teensy Board with HalfKay Bootloader + * http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html + * Copyright 2008-2010, PJRC.COM, LLC + * + * + * You may redistribute this program and/or modify it under the terms + * of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software + * Foundation, version 3 of the License. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + * GNU General Public License for more details. + * + * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + * along with this program. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ + */ + +/* Want to incorporate this code into a proprietary application?? + * Just email paul@pjrc.com to ask. Usually it's not a problem, + * but you do need to ask to use this code in any way other than + * those permitted by the GNU General Public License, version 3 */ + +/* For non-root permissions on ubuntu or similar udev-based linux + * http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/49-teensy.rules + */ + +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <stdint.h> +#include <stdarg.h> +#include <string.h> +#include <unistd.h> + +void usage(void) +{ + fprintf(stderr, "Usage: hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=<MCU> [-w] [-h] [-n] [-v] <file.hex>\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\t-w : Wait for device to appear\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\t-r : Use hard reboot if device not online\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\t-n : No reboot after programming\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\t-v : Verbose output\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\n<MCU> = atmegaXXuY or at90usbXXXY"); + + fprintf(stderr, "\nFor support and more information, please visit:\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "http://www.lufa-lib.org\n"); + + fprintf(stderr, "\nBased on the TeensyHID command line programmer software:\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html\n"); + exit(1); +} + +// USB Access Functions +int teensy_open(void); +int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout); +void teensy_close(void); +int hard_reboot(void); + +// Intel Hex File Functions +int read_intel_hex(const char *filename); +int ihex_bytes_within_range(int begin, int end); +void ihex_get_data(int addr, int len, unsigned char *bytes); + +// Misc stuff +int printf_verbose(const char *format, ...); +void delay(double seconds); +void die(const char *str, ...); +void parse_options(int argc, char **argv); + +// options (from user via command line args) +int wait_for_device_to_appear = 0; +int hard_reboot_device = 0; +int reboot_after_programming = 1; +int verbose = 0; +int code_size = 0, block_size = 0; +const char *filename=NULL; + + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* Main Program */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +int main(int argc, char **argv) +{ + unsigned char buf[260]; + int num, addr, r, first_block=1, waited=0; + + // parse command line arguments + parse_options(argc, argv); + if (!filename) { + fprintf(stderr, "Filename must be specified\n\n"); + usage(); + } + if (!code_size) { + fprintf(stderr, "MCU type must be specified\n\n"); + usage(); + } + printf_verbose("Teensy Loader, Command Line, Version 2.0\n"); + + // read the intel hex file + // this is done first so any error is reported before using USB + num = read_intel_hex(filename); + if (num < 0) die("error reading intel hex file \"%s\"", filename); + printf_verbose("Read \"%s\": %d bytes, %.1f%% usage\n", + filename, num, (double)num / (double)code_size * 100.0); + + // open the USB device + while (1) { + if (teensy_open()) break; + if (hard_reboot_device) { + if (!hard_reboot()) die("Unable to find rebootor\n"); + printf_verbose("Hard Reboot performed\n"); + hard_reboot_device = 0; // only hard reboot once + wait_for_device_to_appear = 1; + } + if (!wait_for_device_to_appear) die("Unable to open device\n"); + if (!waited) { + printf_verbose("Waiting for Teensy device...\n"); + printf_verbose(" (hint: press the reset button)\n"); + waited = 1; + } + delay(0.25); + } + printf_verbose("Found HalfKay Bootloader\n"); + + // if we waited for the device, read the hex file again + // perhaps it changed while we were waiting? + if (waited) { + num = read_intel_hex(filename); + if (num < 0) die("error reading intel hex file \"%s\"", filename); + printf_verbose("Read \"%s\": %d bytes, %.1f%% usage\n", + filename, num, (double)num / (double)code_size * 100.0); + } + + // program the data + printf_verbose("Programming"); + fflush(stdout); + for (addr = 0; addr < code_size; addr += block_size) { + if (addr > 0 && !ihex_bytes_within_range(addr, addr + block_size - 1)) { + // don't waste time on blocks that are unused, + // but always do the first one to erase the chip + continue; + } + printf_verbose("."); + if (code_size < 0x10000) { + buf[0] = addr & 255; + buf[1] = (addr >> 8) & 255; + } else { + buf[0] = (addr >> 8) & 255; + buf[1] = (addr >> 16) & 255; + } + ihex_get_data(addr, block_size, buf + 2); + r = teensy_write(buf, block_size + 2, first_block ? 3.0 : 0.25); + if (!r) die("error writing to Teensy\n"); + first_block = 0; + } + printf_verbose("\n"); + + // reboot to the user's new code + if (reboot_after_programming) { + printf_verbose("Booting\n"); + buf[0] = 0xFF; + buf[1] = 0xFF; + memset(buf + 2, 0, sizeof(buf) - 2); + teensy_write(buf, block_size + 2, 0.25); + } + teensy_close(); + return 0; +} + + + + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* USB Access - libusb (Linux & FreeBSD) */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +#if defined(USE_LIBUSB) + +// http://libusb.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html +#include <usb.h> + +usb_dev_handle * open_usb_device(int vid, int pid) +{ + struct usb_bus *bus; + struct usb_device *dev; + usb_dev_handle *h; + #ifdef LIBUSB_HAS_GET_DRIVER_NP + char buf[128]; + #endif + int r; + + usb_init(); + usb_find_busses(); + usb_find_devices(); + //printf_verbose("\nSearching for USB device:\n"); + for (bus = usb_get_busses(); bus; bus = bus->next) { + for (dev = bus->devices; dev; dev = dev->next) { + //printf_verbose("bus \"%s\", device \"%s\" vid=%04X, pid=%04X\n", + // bus->dirname, dev->filename, + // dev->descriptor.idVendor, + // dev->descriptor.idProduct + //); + if (dev->descriptor.idVendor != vid) continue; + if (dev->descriptor.idProduct != pid) continue; + h = usb_open(dev); + if (!h) { + printf_verbose("Found device but unable to open"); + continue; + } + #ifdef LIBUSB_HAS_GET_DRIVER_NP + r = usb_get_driver_np(h, 0, buf, sizeof(buf)); + if (r >= 0) { + r = usb_detach_kernel_driver_np(h, 0); + if (r < 0) { + usb_close(h); + printf_verbose("Device is in use by \"%s\" driver", buf); + continue; + } + } + #endif + // Mac OS-X - removing this call to usb_claim_interface() might allow + // this to work, even though it is a clear misuse of the libusb API. + // normally Apple's IOKit should be used on Mac OS-X + r = usb_claim_interface(h, 0); + if (r < 0) { + usb_close(h); + printf_verbose("Unable to claim interface, check USB permissions"); + continue; + } + return h; + } + } + return NULL; +} + +static usb_dev_handle *libusb_teensy_handle = NULL; + +int teensy_open(void) +{ + teensy_close(); + libusb_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478); + + if (!libusb_teensy_handle) + libusb_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return 0; + return 1; +} + +int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout) +{ + int r; + + if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return 0; + r = usb_control_msg(libusb_teensy_handle, 0x21, 9, 0x0200, 0, (char *)buf, + len, (int)(timeout * 1000.0)); + if (r < 0) return 0; + return 1; +} + +void teensy_close(void) +{ + if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return; + usb_release_interface(libusb_teensy_handle, 0); + usb_close(libusb_teensy_handle); + libusb_teensy_handle = NULL; +} + +int hard_reboot(void) +{ + usb_dev_handle *rebootor; + int r; + + rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477); + + if (!rebootor) + rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (!rebootor) return 0; + r = usb_control_msg(rebootor, 0x21, 9, 0x0200, 0, "reboot", 6, 100); + usb_release_interface(rebootor, 0); + usb_close(rebootor); + if (r < 0) return 0; + return 1; +} + +#endif + + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* USB Access - Microsoft WIN32 */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +#if defined(USE_WIN32) + +// http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms790932.aspx +#include <windows.h> +#include <setupapi.h> +#include <ddk/hidsdi.h> +#include <ddk/hidclass.h> + +HANDLE open_usb_device(int vid, int pid) +{ + GUID guid; + HDEVINFO info; + DWORD index, required_size; + SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA iface; + SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA *details; + HIDD_ATTRIBUTES attrib; + HANDLE h; + BOOL ret; + + HidD_GetHidGuid(&guid); + info = SetupDiGetClassDevs(&guid, NULL, NULL, DIGCF_PRESENT | DIGCF_DEVICEINTERFACE); + if (info == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) return NULL; + for (index=0; 1 ;index++) { + iface.cbSize = sizeof(SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA); + ret = SetupDiEnumDeviceInterfaces(info, NULL, &guid, index, &iface); + if (!ret) { + SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(info); + break; + } + SetupDiGetInterfaceDeviceDetail(info, &iface, NULL, 0, &required_size, NULL); + details = (SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA *)malloc(required_size); + if (details == NULL) continue; + memset(details, 0, required_size); + details->cbSize = sizeof(SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA); + ret = SetupDiGetDeviceInterfaceDetail(info, &iface, details, + required_size, NULL, NULL); + if (!ret) { + free(details); + continue; + } + h = CreateFile(details->DevicePath, GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, + FILE_SHARE_READ|FILE_SHARE_WRITE, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, + FILE_FLAG_OVERLAPPED, NULL); + free(details); + if (h == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) continue; + attrib.Size = sizeof(HIDD_ATTRIBUTES); + ret = HidD_GetAttributes(h, &attrib); + if (!ret) { + CloseHandle(h); + continue; + } + if (attrib.VendorID != vid || attrib.ProductID != pid) { + CloseHandle(h); + continue; + } + SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(info); + return h; + } + return NULL; +} + +int write_usb_device(HANDLE h, void *buf, int len, int timeout) +{ + static HANDLE event = NULL; + unsigned char tmpbuf[1040]; + OVERLAPPED ov; + DWORD n, r; + + if (len > sizeof(tmpbuf) - 1) return 0; + if (event == NULL) { + event = CreateEvent(NULL, TRUE, TRUE, NULL); + if (!event) return 0; + } + ResetEvent(&event); + memset(&ov, 0, sizeof(ov)); + ov.hEvent = event; + tmpbuf[0] = 0; + memcpy(tmpbuf + 1, buf, len); + if (!WriteFile(h, tmpbuf, len + 1, NULL, &ov)) { + if (GetLastError() != ERROR_IO_PENDING) return 0; + r = WaitForSingleObject(event, timeout); + if (r == WAIT_TIMEOUT) { + CancelIo(h); + return 0; + } + if (r != WAIT_OBJECT_0) return 0; + } + if (!GetOverlappedResult(h, &ov, &n, FALSE)) return 0; + return 1; +} + +static HANDLE win32_teensy_handle = NULL; + +int teensy_open(void) +{ + teensy_close(); + win32_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478); + + if (!win32_teensy_handle) + win32_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (!win32_teensy_handle) return 0; + return 1; +} + +int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout) +{ + int r; + if (!win32_teensy_handle) return 0; + r = write_usb_device(win32_teensy_handle, buf, len, (int)(timeout * 1000.0)); + return r; +} + +void teensy_close(void) +{ + if (!win32_teensy_handle) return; + CloseHandle(win32_teensy_handle); + win32_teensy_handle = NULL; +} + +int hard_reboot(void) +{ + HANDLE rebootor; + int r; + + rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477); + + if (!rebootor) + rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (!rebootor) return 0; + r = write_usb_device(rebootor, "reboot", 6, 100); + CloseHandle(rebootor); + return r; +} + +#endif + + + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* USB Access - Apple's IOKit, Mac OS-X */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +#if defined(USE_APPLE_IOKIT) + +// http://developer.apple.com/technotes/tn2007/tn2187.html +#include <IOKit/IOKitLib.h> +#include <IOKit/hid/IOHIDLib.h> +#include <IOKit/hid/IOHIDDevice.h> + +struct usb_list_struct { + IOHIDDeviceRef ref; + int pid; + int vid; + struct usb_list_struct *next; +}; + +static struct usb_list_struct *usb_list=NULL; +static IOHIDManagerRef hid_manager=NULL; + +void attach_callback(void *context, IOReturn r, void *hid_mgr, IOHIDDeviceRef dev) +{ + CFTypeRef type; + struct usb_list_struct *n, *p; + int32_t pid, vid; + + if (!dev) return; + type = IOHIDDeviceGetProperty(dev, CFSTR(kIOHIDVendorIDKey)); + if (!type || CFGetTypeID(type) != CFNumberGetTypeID()) return; + if (!CFNumberGetValue((CFNumberRef)type, kCFNumberSInt32Type, &vid)) return; + type = IOHIDDeviceGetProperty(dev, CFSTR(kIOHIDProductIDKey)); + if (!type || CFGetTypeID(type) != CFNumberGetTypeID()) return; + if (!CFNumberGetValue((CFNumberRef)type, kCFNumberSInt32Type, &pid)) return; + n = (struct usb_list_struct *)malloc(sizeof(struct usb_list_struct)); + if (!n) return; + //printf("attach callback: vid=%04X, pid=%04X\n", vid, pid); + n->ref = dev; + n->vid = vid; + n->pid = pid; + n->next = NULL; + if (usb_list == NULL) { + usb_list = n; + } else { + for (p = usb_list; p->next; p = p->next) ; + p->next = n; + } +} + +void detach_callback(void *context, IOReturn r, void *hid_mgr, IOHIDDeviceRef dev) +{ + struct usb_list_struct *p, *tmp, *prev=NULL; + + p = usb_list; + while (p) { + if (p->ref == dev) { + if (prev) { + prev->next = p->next; + } else { + usb_list = p->next; + } + tmp = p; + p = p->next; + free(tmp); + } else { + prev = p; + p = p->next; + } + } +} + +void init_hid_manager(void) +{ + CFMutableDictionaryRef dict; + IOReturn ret; + + if (hid_manager) return; + hid_manager = IOHIDManagerCreate(kCFAllocatorDefault, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone); + if (hid_manager == NULL || CFGetTypeID(hid_manager) != IOHIDManagerGetTypeID()) { + if (hid_manager) CFRelease(hid_manager); + printf_verbose("no HID Manager - maybe this is a pre-Leopard (10.5) system?\n"); + return; + } + dict = CFDictionaryCreateMutable(kCFAllocatorDefault, 0, + &kCFTypeDictionaryKeyCallBacks, &kCFTypeDictionaryValueCallBacks); + if (!dict) return; + IOHIDManagerSetDeviceMatching(hid_manager, dict); + CFRelease(dict); + IOHIDManagerScheduleWithRunLoop(hid_manager, CFRunLoopGetCurrent(), kCFRunLoopDefaultMode); + IOHIDManagerRegisterDeviceMatchingCallback(hid_manager, attach_callback, NULL); + IOHIDManagerRegisterDeviceRemovalCallback(hid_manager, detach_callback, NULL); + ret = IOHIDManagerOpen(hid_manager, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone); + if (ret != kIOReturnSuccess) { + IOHIDManagerUnscheduleFromRunLoop(hid_manager, + CFRunLoopGetCurrent(), kCFRunLoopDefaultMode); + CFRelease(hid_manager); + printf_verbose("Error opening HID Manager"); + } +} + +static void do_run_loop(void) +{ + while (CFRunLoopRunInMode(kCFRunLoopDefaultMode, 0, true) == kCFRunLoopRunHandledSource) ; +} + +IOHIDDeviceRef open_usb_device(int vid, int pid) +{ + struct usb_list_struct *p; + IOReturn ret; + + init_hid_manager(); + do_run_loop(); + for (p = usb_list; p; p = p->next) { + if (p->vid == vid && p->pid == pid) { + ret = IOHIDDeviceOpen(p->ref, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone); + if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return p->ref; + } + } + return NULL; +} + +void close_usb_device(IOHIDDeviceRef dev) +{ + struct usb_list_struct *p; + + do_run_loop(); + for (p = usb_list; p; p = p->next) { + if (p->ref == dev) { + IOHIDDeviceClose(dev, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone); + return; + } + } +} + +static IOHIDDeviceRef iokit_teensy_reference = NULL; + +int teensy_open(void) +{ + teensy_close(); + iokit_teensy_reference = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478); + + if (!iokit_teensy_reference) + iokit_teensy_reference = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return 0; + return 1; +} + +int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout) +{ + IOReturn ret; + + // timeouts do not work on OS-X + // IOHIDDeviceSetReportWithCallback is not implemented + // even though Apple documents it with a code example! + // submitted to Apple on 22-sep-2009, problem ID 7245050 + if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return 0; + ret = IOHIDDeviceSetReport(iokit_teensy_reference, + kIOHIDReportTypeOutput, 0, buf, len); + if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return 1; + return 0; +} + +void teensy_close(void) +{ + if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return; + close_usb_device(iokit_teensy_reference); + iokit_teensy_reference = NULL; +} + +int hard_reboot(void) +{ + IOHIDDeviceRef rebootor; + IOReturn ret; + + rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477); + + if (!rebootor) + rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (!rebootor) return 0; + ret = IOHIDDeviceSetReport(rebootor, + kIOHIDReportTypeOutput, 0, (uint8_t *)("reboot"), 6); + close_usb_device(rebootor); + if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return 1; + return 0; +} + +#endif + + + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* USB Access - BSD's UHID driver */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +#if defined(USE_UHID) + +// Thanks to Todd T Fries for help getting this working on OpenBSD +// and to Chris Kuethe for the initial patch to use UHID. + +#include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <dirent.h> +#include <dev/usb/usb.h> +#ifndef USB_GET_DEVICEINFO +#include <dev/usb/usb_ioctl.h> +#endif + +#ifndef USB_GET_DEVICEINFO +# define USB_GET_DEVICEINFO 0 +# error The USB_GET_DEVICEINFO ioctl() value is not defined for your system. +#endif + +int open_usb_device(int vid, int pid) +{ + int r, fd; + DIR *dir; + struct dirent *d; + struct usb_device_info info; + char buf[256]; + + dir = opendir("/dev"); + if (!dir) return -1; + while ((d = readdir(dir)) != NULL) { + if (strncmp(d->d_name, "uhid", 4) != 0) continue; + snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "/dev/%s", d->d_name); + fd = open(buf, O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) continue; + r = ioctl(fd, USB_GET_DEVICEINFO, &info); + if (r < 0) { + // NetBSD: added in 2004 + // OpenBSD: added November 23, 2009 + // FreeBSD: missing (FreeBSD 8.0) - USE_LIBUSB works! + die("Error: your uhid driver does not support" + " USB_GET_DEVICEINFO, please upgrade!\n"); + close(fd); + closedir(dir); + exit(1); + } + //printf("%s: v=%d, p=%d\n", buf, info.udi_vendorNo, info.udi_productNo); + if (info.udi_vendorNo == vid && info.udi_productNo == pid) { + closedir(dir); + return fd; + } + close(fd); + } + closedir(dir); + return -1; +} + +static int uhid_teensy_fd = -1; + +int teensy_open(void) +{ + teensy_close(); + uhid_teensy_fd = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478); + + if (uhid_teensy_fd < 0) + uhid_teensy_fd = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (uhid_teensy_fd < 0) return 0; + return 1; +} + +int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout) +{ + int r; + + // TODO: implement timeout... how?? + r = write(uhid_teensy_fd, buf, len); + if (r == len) return 1; + return 0; +} + +void teensy_close(void) +{ + if (uhid_teensy_fd >= 0) { + close(uhid_teensy_fd); + uhid_teensy_fd = -1; + } +} + +int hard_reboot(void) +{ + int r, rebootor_fd; + + rebootor_fd = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477); + + if (rebootor_fd < 0) + rebootor_fd = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067); + + if (rebootor_fd < 0) return 0; + r = write(rebootor_fd, "reboot", 6); + delay(0.1); + close(rebootor_fd); + if (r == 6) return 1; + return 0; +} + +#endif + + + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* Read Intel Hex File */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +// the maximum flash image size we can support +// chips with larger memory may be used, but only this +// much intel-hex data can be loaded into memory! +#define MAX_MEMORY_SIZE 0x10000 + +static unsigned char firmware_image[MAX_MEMORY_SIZE]; +static unsigned char firmware_mask[MAX_MEMORY_SIZE]; +static int end_record_seen=0; +static int byte_count; +static unsigned int extended_addr = 0; +static int parse_hex_line(char *line); + +int read_intel_hex(const char *filename) +{ + FILE *fp; + int i, lineno=0; + char buf[1024]; + + byte_count = 0; + end_record_seen = 0; + for (i=0; i<MAX_MEMORY_SIZE; i++) { + firmware_image[i] = 0xFF; + firmware_mask[i] = 0; + } + extended_addr = 0; + + fp = fopen(filename, "r"); + if (fp == NULL) { + //printf("Unable to read file %s\n", filename); + return -1; + } + while (!feof(fp)) { + *buf = '\0'; + if (!fgets(buf, sizeof(buf), fp)) break; + lineno++; + if (*buf) { + if (parse_hex_line(buf) == 0) { + //printf("Warning, parse error line %d\n", lineno); + fclose(fp); + return -2; + } + } + if (end_record_seen) break; + if (feof(stdin)) break; + } + fclose(fp); + return byte_count; +} + + +/* from ihex.c, at http://www.pjrc.com/tech/8051/pm2_docs/intel-hex.html */ + +/* parses a line of intel hex code, stores the data in bytes[] */ +/* and the beginning address in addr, and returns a 1 if the */ +/* line was valid, or a 0 if an error occurred. The variable */ +/* num gets the number of bytes that were stored into bytes[] */ + + +int +parse_hex_line(char *line) +{ + int addr, code, num; + int sum, len, cksum, i; + char *ptr; + + num = 0; + if (line[0] != ':') return 0; + if (strlen(line) < 11) return 0; + ptr = line+1; + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &len)) return 0; + ptr += 2; + if ((int)strlen(line) < (11 + (len * 2)) ) return 0; + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &addr)) return 0; + ptr += 4; + /* printf("Line: length=%d Addr=%d\n", len, addr); */ + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &code)) return 0; + if (addr + extended_addr + len >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) return 0; + ptr += 2; + sum = (len & 255) + ((addr >> 8) & 255) + (addr & 255) + (code & 255); + if (code != 0) { + if (code == 1) { + end_record_seen = 1; + return 1; + } + if (code == 2 && len == 2) { + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &i)) return 1; + ptr += 4; + sum += ((i >> 8) & 255) + (i & 255); + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 1; + if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 1; + extended_addr = i << 4; + //printf("ext addr = %05X\n", extended_addr); + } + if (code == 4 && len == 2) { + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &i)) return 1; + ptr += 4; + sum += ((i >> 8) & 255) + (i & 255); + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 1; + if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 1; + extended_addr = i << 16; + //printf("ext addr = %08X\n", extended_addr); + } + return 1; // non-data line + } + byte_count += len; + while (num != len) { + if (sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &i) != 1) return 0; + i &= 255; + firmware_image[addr + extended_addr + num] = i; + firmware_mask[addr + extended_addr + num] = 1; + ptr += 2; + sum += i; + (num)++; + if (num >= 256) return 0; + } + if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 0; + if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 0; /* checksum error */ + return 1; +} + +int ihex_bytes_within_range(int begin, int end) +{ + int i; + + if (begin < 0 || begin >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE || + end < 0 || end >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) { + return 0; + } + for (i=begin; i<=end; i++) { + if (firmware_mask[i]) return 1; + } + return 0; +} + +void ihex_get_data(int addr, int len, unsigned char *bytes) +{ + int i; + + if (addr < 0 || len < 0 || addr + len >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) { + for (i=0; i<len; i++) { + bytes[i] = 255; + } + return; + } + for (i=0; i<len; i++) { + if (firmware_mask[addr]) { + bytes[i] = firmware_image[addr]; + } else { + bytes[i] = 255; + } + addr++; + } +} + +/****************************************************************/ +/* */ +/* Misc Functions */ +/* */ +/****************************************************************/ + +int printf_verbose(const char *format, ...) +{ + va_list ap; + int r = 0; + + va_start(ap, format); + if (verbose) { + r = vprintf(format, ap); + fflush(stdout); + } + va_end(ap); + + return r; +} + +void delay(double seconds) +{ + #ifdef USE_WIN32 + sleep(seconds * 1000.0); + #else + usleep(seconds * 1000000.0); + #endif +} + +void die(const char *str, ...) +{ + va_list ap; + + va_start(ap, str); + vfprintf(stderr, str, ap); + fprintf(stderr, "\n"); + va_end(ap); + + exit(1); +} + +#if defined USE_WIN32 +#define strcasecmp stricmp +#endif + +void parse_options(int argc, char **argv) +{ + int i; + const char *arg; + + for (i=1; i<argc; i++) { + arg = argv[i]; + + if (*arg == '-') { + if (strcmp(arg, "-w") == 0) { + wait_for_device_to_appear = 1; + } else if (strcmp(arg, "-r") == 0) { + hard_reboot_device = 1; + } else if (strcmp(arg, "-n") == 0) { + reboot_after_programming = 0; + } else if (strcmp(arg, "-v") == 0) { + verbose = 1; + } else if (strncmp(arg, "-mmcu=", 6) == 0) { + arg += 6; + + if (strncmp(arg, "at90usb", 7) == 0) { + arg += 7; + } else if (strncmp(arg, "atmega", 6) == 0) { + arg += 6; + } else { + die("Unknown MCU type\n"); + } + + if (strncmp(arg, "128", 3) == 0) { + code_size = 128 * 1024; + block_size = 256; + } else if (strncmp(arg, "64", 2) == 0) { + code_size = 64 * 1024; + block_size = 256; + } else if (strncmp(arg, "32", 2) == 0) { + code_size = 32 * 1024; + block_size = 128; + } else if (strncmp(arg, "16", 2) == 0) { + code_size = 16 * 1024; + block_size = 128; + } else if (strncmp(arg, "8", 1) == 0) { + code_size = 8 * 1024; + block_size = 128; + } else { + die("Unknown MCU type\n"); + } + } + } else { + filename = argv[i]; + } + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb824f582 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +""" + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +""" + +""" + Front-end programmer for the LUFA HID class bootloader. + + Usage: + python hid_bootloader_loader.py <Device> <Input>.hex + + Example: + python hid_bootloader_loader.py at90usb1287 Mouse.hex + + Requires the pywinusb (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/) and + IntelHex (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/IntelHex/) libraries. +""" + +import sys +from pywinusb import hid +from intelhex import IntelHex + + +# Device information table +device_info_map = dict() +device_info_map['at90usb1287'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 128} +device_info_map['at90usb1286'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 128} +device_info_map['at90usb647'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 64} +device_info_map['at90usb646'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 64} +device_info_map['atmega32u4'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 32} +device_info_map['atmega32u2'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 32} +device_info_map['atmega16u4'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16} +device_info_map['atmega16u2'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16} +device_info_map['at90usb162'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16} +device_info_map['atmega8u2'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 8} +device_info_map['at90usb82'] = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 8} + + +def get_hid_device_handle(): + hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=0x03EB, + product_id=0x2067) + + valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices() + + if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0: + return None + else: + return valid_hid_devices[0] + + +def send_page_data(hid_device, address, data): + # Bootloader page data should be the HID Report ID (always zero) followed + # by the starting address to program, then one device's flash page worth + # of data + output_report_data = [0] + output_report_data.extend([address & 0xFF, address >> 8]) + output_report_data.extend(data) + + hid_device.send_output_report(output_report_data) + + +def program_device(hex_data, device_info): + hid_device = get_hid_device_handle() + + if hid_device is None: + print("No valid HID device found.") + sys.exit(1) + + try: + hid_device.open() + print("Connected to bootloader.") + + # Program in all data from the loaded HEX file, in a number of device + # page sized chunks + for addr in range(0, hex_data.maxaddr(), device_info['page_size']): + # Compute the address range of the current page in the device + current_page_range = range(addr, addr+device_info['page_size']) + + # Extract the data from the hex file at the specified start page + # address and convert it to a regular list of bytes + page_data = [hex_data[i] for i in current_page_range] + + print("Writing address 0x%04X-0x%04X" % (current_page_range[0], current_page_range[-1])) + + # Devices with more than 64KB of flash should shift down the page + # address so that it is 16-bit (page size is guaranteed to be + # >= 256 bytes so no non-zero address bits are discarded) + if device_info['flash_kb'] < 64: + send_page_data(hid_device, addr, page_data) + else: + send_page_data(hid_device, addr >> 8, page_data) + + # Once programming is complete, start the application via a dummy page + # program to the page address 0xFFFF + print("Programming complete, starting application.") + send_page_data(hid_device, 0xFFFF, [0] * device_info['page_size']) + + finally: + hid_device.close() + + +if __name__ == '__main__': + # Load the specified HEX file + try: + hex_data = IntelHex(sys.argv[2]) + except: + print("Could not open the specified HEX file.") + sys.exit(1) + + # Retrieve the device information entry for the specified device + try: + device_info = device_info_map[sys.argv[1]] + except: + print("Unknown device name specified.") + sys.exit(1) + + program_device(hex_data, device_info) diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9394b1353 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="HID Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_128kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="HID Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_64kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="HID Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_32kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="HID Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 2KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.16_2" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_16kb_2kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3800"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3800"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="HID Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 2KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.8_2" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_8kb_2kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1800"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1800"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid" caption="HID Bootloader">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ HID Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device via a custom cross-platform command line utility when plugged into a host.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="."/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderHID.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderHID.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderHID.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostLoaderApp"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostLoaderApp_Python"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c3de5ab9 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2398 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - HID Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ \ + HostLoaderApp/ \ + HostLoaderApp_Python/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM \ + ATTR_NO_INIT + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12cfadb5d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = BootloaderHID +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) + +# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must +# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the +# device's fuses. +FLASH_SIZE_KB := 128 +BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB := 8 + +# Bootloader address calculation formulas +# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above. +CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) ) +BOOT_START_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 ) +BOOT_SEC_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) ) + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..491c506d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Bootloader user application API functions. + */ + +#include "BootloaderAPI.h" + +void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_erase_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_write_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word) +{ + boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_signature_byte_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits) +{ + boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4889b4c0d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderAPI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + /* Macros: */ + #if AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE > 0 + #define AUX_BOOT_SECTION __attribute__((section(".boot_aux"))) + #else + #define AUX_BOOT_SECTION + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void); + void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30165700d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+ software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+ without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+ all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#if AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE > 0
+#warning Using a AUX bootloader section in addition to the defined bootloader space (see documentation).
+
+; Trampoline to jump over the AUX bootloader section to the start of the bootloader,
+; on devices where an AUX bootloader section is used.
+.section .boot_aux_trampoline, "ax"
+.global Boot_AUX_Trampoline
+Boot_AUX_Trampoline:
+ jmp BOOT_START_ADDR
+#endif
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+ BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+ BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+ BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+ BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+ BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+ BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+ BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+ ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+ .long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+ .word 0xDF30 ; Signature for the MS class bootloader, V1
+ .word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c9697b66 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Mass Storage class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_MASSSTORAGE_C +#include "BootloaderMassStorage.h" + +/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR, + .Size = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, + .Size = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .TotalLUNs = 1, + }, + }; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * started via a forced watchdog reset. + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader + * will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held + * low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value + * \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start. + */ +uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT; + +/** Indicates if the bootloader is allowed to exit immediately if \ref RunBootloader is \c false. During shutdown all + * pending commands must be processed before jumping to the user-application, thus this tracks the main program loop + * iterations since a SCSI command from the host was received. + */ +static uint8_t TicksSinceLastCommand = 0; + + +/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application + * start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid, + * this will force the user application to start via a software jump. + */ +void Application_Jump_Check(void) +{ + bool JumpToApplication = false; + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO) + /* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTC |= (1 << 7); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0); + + /* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */ + PORTC &= ~(1 << 7); + #elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + /* Disable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_DISABLE(); + + /* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTF |= (1 << 4); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0); + + /* Re-enable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_ENABLE(); + #else + /* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */ + if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST) + { + /* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */ + if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF); + } + else + { + /* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application; + * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */ + if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + } + #endif + + /* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */ + bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF); + + /* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */ + if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid) + { + /* Turn off the watchdog */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */ + MagicBootKey = 0; + + // cppcheck-suppress constStatement + ((void (*)(void))0x0000)(); + } +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + while (RunBootloader || TicksSinceLastCommand++ < 0xFF) + { + MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } + + /* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */ + USB_Detach(); + + /* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */ + MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY; + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +static void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */ + TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1); + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10)); +} + +/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */ +ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + /* Setup Mass Storage Data Endpoints */ + ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface); + + /* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface); +} + +/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + + /* Signal that a command was processed, must not exit bootloader yet */ + TicksSinceLastCommand = 0; + + return CommandSuccess; +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9ddee4d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderMassStorage.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <string.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include "Lib/SCSI.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__) + #error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY LEDS_LED2 + + /** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */ + #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY 0xDC42 + + /* Global Variables: */ + extern bool RunBootloader; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int main(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_MASSSTORAGE_C) + static void SetupHardware(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0fea9d9fb --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mass Storage Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i> + * \li ATMEGA32U2 - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i> + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Mass Storage Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n + * USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n + * SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n + * SCSI Block Commands Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a Mass Storage device, capable of reading and writing a new binary + * firmware image file, to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit + * into 6KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to + * edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the + * bootloader from the normal user application. + * + * \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device + * lockbits are set. + * + * \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader + * + * On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of + * the AVR is grounded when the device is reset. + * + * The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses: + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from + * the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the + * device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily. + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software + * jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set). + * + * For board specific exceptions to the above, see below. + * + * \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board + * Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the + * \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board + * Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the + * \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation + * + * This bootloader uses the Mass Storage drivers inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional + * drivers need to be supplied for correct operation. + * + * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application + * + * This bootloader is compatible with all operating systems that support the FAT12 file system format. To reprogram the + * device, overwrite a file stored on the virtual FAT filesystem with a new binary (BIN format) image. Remember to safely + * remove your device from the host using the host OS's ejection APIs, to ensure all data is correctly flushed to the + * bootloader's virtual filesystem and not cached in the OS's file system driver. + * + * The current device firmware can be read from the device by reading a file from the virtual FAT filesystem. Two files will + * be present: + * - <b>FLASH.BIN</b>, representing the AVR's internal flash memory + * - <b>EEPROM.BIN</b>, representing the AVR's internal EEPROM memory + * + * To convert an existing Intel HEX (.HEX) program file to a binary (.BIN) file suitable for this bootloader, run: + * \code + * avr-objcopy -O binary -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature input.hex output.bin + * \endcode + * From a terminal, replacing <tt>input.hex</tt> and <tt>output.bin</tt> with the respective input and output filenames. + * AVR EEPROM data files in Intel HEX format (.EEP) uses a similar technique: + * \code + * avr-objcopy -O binary input.eep output.bin + * \endcode + * + * \warning This bootloader is currently <b>incompatible with the Apple MacOS X OS Finder GUI</b>, due to the + * large amount of meta files this OS attempts to write to the disk along with the new binaries. On + * this platform, firmwares must be copied to the disk via the Terminal application only to prevent + * firmware corruption. + * + * \section Sec_API User Application API + * + * Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader, + * allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data. + * + * By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the + * following layout: + * + * \code + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE 32 + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE) + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index) (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2) + * + * void (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6); + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE 0xDCFB + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_SIGNATURE 0xDF30 + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH 4 + * \endcode + * + * From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address + * \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader + * can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them + * to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes + * of FLASH memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START. + * + * \subsection SSec_Aux_Space Auxiliary Bootloader Section + * To make the bootloader function on smaller devices (those with a physical bootloader section of smaller than 6KB) a second + * section of memory (called the <i>Auxiliary Bootloader Section</i>) is added before the start of the real bootloader section, + * and is filled with a portion of the bootloader code. This allows smaller devices to run the bootloader, at the cost of an + * additional portion of the device's FLASH (the bootloader section size in KB subtracted from the 6KB total size). A small + * trampoline is inserted at the start of the auxiliary section so that the bootloader will run normally in the case of a blank + * application section. + * + * On devices supporting a 8KB bootloader section size, the AUX section is not created in the final binary. + * + * \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map + * The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader. + * + * \verbatim + * +----------------------------+ 0x0000 + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | User Application | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE + * | Booloader Start Trampoline | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE + 4 + * | | + * | Auxiliary Bootloader | + * | Space for Smaller Devices | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE + * | | + * | Bootloader Application | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96 + * | API Table Trampolines | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32 + * | Bootloader API Table | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8 + * | Bootloader ID Constants | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND + * \endverbatim + * + * \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues: + * + * \par In some cases, the application is not fully loaded into the device. + * Write-caching on some operating systems may interfere with the normal + * operation of the bootloader. Write caching should be disabled when using the + * Mass Storage bootloader, or the file system synced via an appropriate command + * (such as the OS's normal disk ejection command) before disconnecting the device. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to disable automatic start of the loaded application when the virtual + * Mass Storage disk is ejected on the host.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92eb364dc --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure LUFA's + * compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time + * constants supplied through a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + +// #define NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..735317867 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS + #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE + #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8bdbd4f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2045, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + .ProductStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .MS_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass, + .SubClass = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass, + .Protocol = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MS_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .MS_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + /* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */ + if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device) + { + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + } + else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration) + { + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..506f41af8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "BootloaderAPI.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Mass Storage Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MS_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataOutEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c14eb901 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c @@ -0,0 +1,294 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage + * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information, + * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C +#include "SCSI.h" + +/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's + * features and capabilities. + */ +static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = + { + .DeviceType = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK, + .PeripheralQualifier = 0, + + .Removable = true, + + .Version = 0, + + .ResponseDataFormat = 2, + .NormACA = false, + .TrmTsk = false, + .AERC = false, + + .AdditionalLength = 0x1F, + + .SoftReset = false, + .CmdQue = false, + .Linked = false, + .Sync = false, + .WideBus16Bit = false, + .WideBus32Bit = false, + .RelAddr = false, + + .VendorID = "LUFA", + .ProductID = "Bootloader", + .RevisionID = {'0','.','0','0'}, + }; + +/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE + * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete. + */ +static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData = + { + .ResponseCode = 0x70, + .AdditionalLength = 0x0A, + }; + + +/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches + * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns + * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise + */ +bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess = false; + + /* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */ + switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0]) + { + case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT: +#if !defined(NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT) + /* If the user ejected the volume, signal bootloader exit at next opportunity. */ + RunBootloader = ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4] & 0x03) != 0x02); +#endif + case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC: + case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY: + case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL: + case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10: + /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */ + CommandSuccess = true; + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + break; + default: + /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + break; + } + + /* Check if command was successfully processed */ + if (CommandSuccess) + { + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features + * and capabilities to the host. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint16_t AllocationLength = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]); + uint16_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData)); + + /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */ + if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) || + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]) + { + /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command, + * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData)); + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity + * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + Endpoint_Write_32_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1); + Endpoint_Write_32_BE(SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address + * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual + * reading and writing of the data. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * \param[in] IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE) + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead) +{ + uint16_t BlockAddress; + uint16_t TotalBlocks; + + /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]); + + /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + TotalBlocks = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]); + + /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */ + if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */ + for (uint16_t i = 0; i < TotalBlocks; i++) + { + if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ) + VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(BlockAddress + i); + else + VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(BlockAddress + i); + } + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES); + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about + * the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Send an empty header response indicating Write Protect flag is off */ + Endpoint_Write_32_LE(0); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4; + + return true; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..419559336 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SCSI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_H_ +#define _SCSI_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../BootloaderMassStorage.h" + #include "../Descriptors.h" + #include "VirtualFAT.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This + * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about + * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner. + * + * \param[in] Key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to + * \param[in] Acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to + * \param[in] Aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to + */ + #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual) do { SenseData.SenseKey = (Key); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (Acode); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0) + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_READ true + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_WRITE false + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK 0x00 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C) + static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ffd453128 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c @@ -0,0 +1,482 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Virtualized FAT12 filesystem implementation, to perform self-programming + * in response to read and write requests to the virtual filesystem by the + * host PC. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_VIRTUAL_FAT_C +#include "VirtualFAT.h" + +/** FAT filesystem boot sector block, must be the first sector on the physical + * disk so that the host can identify the presence of a FAT filesystem. This + * block is truncated; normally a large bootstrap section is located near the + * end of the block for booting purposes however as this is not meant to be a + * bootable disk it is omitted for space reasons. + * + * \note When returning the boot block to the host, the magic signature 0xAA55 + * must be added to the very end of the block to identify it as a boot + * block. + */ +static const FATBootBlock_t BootBlock = + { + .Bootstrap = {0xEB, 0x3C, 0x90}, + .Description = "mkdosfs", + .SectorSize = SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES, + .SectorsPerCluster = SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER, + .ReservedSectors = 1, + .FATCopies = 2, + .RootDirectoryEntries = (SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES / sizeof(FATDirectoryEntry_t)), + .TotalSectors16 = LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS, + .MediaDescriptor = 0xF8, + .SectorsPerFAT = 1, + .SectorsPerTrack = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS % 64), + .Heads = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS / 64), + .HiddenSectors = 0, + .TotalSectors32 = 0, + .PhysicalDriveNum = 0, + .ExtendedBootRecordSig = 0x29, + .VolumeSerialNumber = 0x12345678, + .VolumeLabel = "LUFA BOOT ", + .FilesystemIdentifier = "FAT12 ", + }; + +/** FAT 8.3 style directory entry, for the virtual FLASH contents file. */ +static FATDirectoryEntry_t FirmwareFileEntries[] = + { + /* Root volume label entry; disk label is contained in the Filename and + * Extension fields (concatenated) with a special attribute flag - other + * fields are ignored. Should be the same as the label in the boot block. + */ + [DISK_FILE_ENTRY_VolumeID] = + { + .MSDOS_Directory = + { + .Name = "LUFA BOOT ", + .Attributes = FAT_FLAG_VOLUME_NAME, + .Reserved = {0}, + .CreationTime = 0, + .CreationDate = 0, + .StartingCluster = 0, + .Reserved2 = 0, + } + }, + + /* VFAT Long File Name entry for the virtual firmware file; required to + * prevent corruption from systems that are unable to detect the device + * as being a legacy MSDOS style FAT12 volume. */ + [DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_LFN] = + { + .VFAT_LongFileName = + { + .Ordinal = 1 | FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY, + .Attribute = FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME, + .Reserved1 = 0, + .Reserved2 = 0, + + .Checksum = FAT_CHECKSUM('F','L','A','S','H',' ',' ',' ','B','I','N'), + + .Unicode1 = 'F', + .Unicode2 = 'L', + .Unicode3 = 'A', + .Unicode4 = 'S', + .Unicode5 = 'H', + .Unicode6 = '.', + .Unicode7 = 'B', + .Unicode8 = 'I', + .Unicode9 = 'N', + .Unicode10 = 0, + .Unicode11 = 0, + .Unicode12 = 0, + .Unicode13 = 0, + } + }, + + /* MSDOS file entry for the virtual Firmware image. */ + [DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS] = + { + .MSDOS_File = + { + .Filename = "FLASH ", + .Extension = "BIN", + .Attributes = 0, + .Reserved = {0}, + .CreationTime = FAT_TIME(1, 1, 0), + .CreationDate = FAT_DATE(14, 2, 1989), + .StartingCluster = 2, + .FileSizeBytes = FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES, + } + }, + + [DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_LFN] = + { + .VFAT_LongFileName = + { + .Ordinal = 1 | FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY, + .Attribute = FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME, + .Reserved1 = 0, + .Reserved2 = 0, + + .Checksum = FAT_CHECKSUM('E','E','P','R','O','M',' ',' ','B','I','N'), + + .Unicode1 = 'E', + .Unicode2 = 'E', + .Unicode3 = 'P', + .Unicode4 = 'R', + .Unicode5 = 'O', + .Unicode6 = 'M', + .Unicode7 = '.', + .Unicode8 = 'B', + .Unicode9 = 'I', + .Unicode10 = 'N', + .Unicode11 = 0, + .Unicode12 = 0, + .Unicode13 = 0, + } + }, + + [DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS] = + { + .MSDOS_File = + { + .Filename = "EEPROM ", + .Extension = "BIN", + .Attributes = 0, + .Reserved = {0}, + .CreationTime = FAT_TIME(1, 1, 0), + .CreationDate = FAT_DATE(14, 2, 1989), + .StartingCluster = 2 + FILE_CLUSTERS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES), + .FileSizeBytes = EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES, + } + }, + }; + +/** Starting cluster of the virtual FLASH.BIN file on disk, tracked so that the + * offset from the start of the data sector can be determined. On Windows + * systems files are usually replaced using the original file's disk clusters, + * while Linux appears to overwrite with an offset which must be compensated for. + */ +static const uint16_t* FLASHFileStartCluster = &FirmwareFileEntries[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS].MSDOS_File.StartingCluster; + +/** Starting cluster of the virtual EEPROM.BIN file on disk, tracked so that the + * offset from the start of the data sector can be determined. On Windows + * systems files are usually replaced using the original file's disk clusters, + * while Linux appears to overwrite with an offset which must be compensated for. + */ +static const uint16_t* EEPROMFileStartCluster = &FirmwareFileEntries[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS].MSDOS_File.StartingCluster; + +/** Reads a byte of EEPROM out from the EEPROM memory space. + * + * \note This function is required as the avr-libc EEPROM functions do not cope + * with linker relaxations, and a jump longer than 4K of FLASH on the + * larger USB AVRs will break the linker. This function is marked as + * never inlinable and placed into the normal text segment so that the + * call to the EEPROM function will be short even if the AUX boot section + * is used. + * + * \param[in] Address Address of the EEPROM location to read from + * + * \return Read byte of EEPROM data. + */ +static uint8_t ReadEEPROMByte(const uint8_t* const Address) +{ + return eeprom_read_byte(Address); +} + +/** Writes a byte of EEPROM out to the EEPROM memory space. + * + * \note This function is required as the avr-libc EEPROM functions do not cope + * with linker relaxations, and a jump longer than 4K of FLASH on the + * larger USB AVRs will break the linker. This function is marked as + * never inlinable and placed into the normal text segment so that the + * call to the EEPROM function will be short even if the AUX boot section + * is used. + * + * \param[in] Address Address of the EEPROM location to write to + * \param[in] Data New data to write to the EEPROM location + */ +static void WriteEEPROMByte(uint8_t* const Address, + const uint8_t Data) +{ + eeprom_update_byte(Address, Data); +} + +/** Updates a FAT12 cluster entry in the FAT file table with the specified next + * chain index. If the cluster is the last in the file chain, the magic value + * \c 0xFFF should be used. + * + * \note FAT data cluster indexes are offset by 2, so that cluster 2 is the + * first file data cluster on the disk. See the FAT specification. + * + * \param[out] FATTable Pointer to the FAT12 allocation table + * \param[in] Index Index of the cluster entry to update + * \param[in] ChainEntry Next cluster index in the file chain + */ +static void UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(uint8_t* const FATTable, + const uint16_t Index, + const uint16_t ChainEntry) +{ + /* Calculate the starting offset of the cluster entry in the FAT12 table */ + uint8_t FATOffset = (Index + (Index >> 1)); + bool UpperNibble = ((Index & 1) != 0); + + /* Check if the start of the entry is at an upper nibble of the byte, fill + * out FAT12 entry as required */ + if (UpperNibble) + { + FATTable[FATOffset] = (FATTable[FATOffset] & 0x0F) | ((ChainEntry & 0x0F) << 4); + FATTable[FATOffset + 1] = (ChainEntry >> 4); + } + else + { + FATTable[FATOffset] = ChainEntry; + FATTable[FATOffset + 1] = (FATTable[FATOffset] & 0xF0) | (ChainEntry >> 8); + } +} + +/** Updates a FAT12 cluster chain in the FAT file table with a linear chain of + * the specified length. + * + * \note FAT data cluster indexes are offset by 2, so that cluster 2 is the + * first file data cluster on the disk. See the FAT specification. + * + * \param[out] FATTable Pointer to the FAT12 allocation table + * \param[in] Index Index of the start of the cluster chain to update + * \param[in] ChainLength Length of the chain to write, in clusters + */ +static void UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(uint8_t* const FATTable, + const uint16_t Index, + const uint8_t ChainLength) +{ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ChainLength; i++) + { + uint16_t CurrentCluster = Index + i; + uint16_t NextCluster = CurrentCluster + 1; + + /* Mark last cluster as end of file */ + if (i == (ChainLength - 1)) + NextCluster = 0xFFF; + + UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(FATTable, CurrentCluster, NextCluster); + } +} + +/** Reads or writes a block of data from/to the physical device FLASH using a + * block buffer stored in RAM, if the requested block is within the virtual + * firmware file's sector ranges in the emulated FAT file system. + * + * \param[in] BlockNumber Physical disk block to read from/write to + * \param[in,out] BlockBuffer Pointer to the start of the block buffer in RAM + * \param[in] Read If \c true, the requested block is read, if + * \c false, the requested block is written + */ +static void ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber, + uint8_t* BlockBuffer, + const bool Read) +{ + uint16_t FileStartBlock = DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock + (*FLASHFileStartCluster - 2) * SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER; + uint16_t FileEndBlock = FileStartBlock + (FILE_SECTORS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) - 1); + + /* Range check the write request - abort if requested block is not within the + * virtual firmware file sector range */ + if (!((BlockNumber >= FileStartBlock) && (BlockNumber <= FileEndBlock))) + return; + + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + uint32_t FlashAddress = (uint32_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; + #else + uint16_t FlashAddress = (uint16_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; + #endif + + if (Read) + { + /* Read out the mapped block of data from the device's FLASH */ + for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++) + { + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + BlockBuffer[i] = pgm_read_byte_far(FlashAddress++); + #else + BlockBuffer[i] = pgm_read_byte(FlashAddress++); + #endif + } + } + else + { + /* Write out the mapped block of data to the device's FLASH */ + for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i += 2) + { + if ((FlashAddress % SPM_PAGESIZE) == 0) + { + /* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */ + BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(FlashAddress); + } + + /* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */ + BootloaderAPI_FillWord(FlashAddress, (BlockBuffer[i + 1] << 8) | BlockBuffer[i]); + FlashAddress += 2; + + if ((FlashAddress % SPM_PAGESIZE) == 0) + { + /* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */ + BootloaderAPI_WritePage(FlashAddress - SPM_PAGESIZE); + } + } + } +} + +/** Reads or writes a block of data from/to the physical device EEPROM using a + * block buffer stored in RAM, if the requested block is within the virtual + * firmware file's sector ranges in the emulated FAT file system. + * + * \param[in] BlockNumber Physical disk block to read from/write to + * \param[in,out] BlockBuffer Pointer to the start of the block buffer in RAM + * \param[in] Read If \c true, the requested block is read, if + * \c false, the requested block is written + */ +static void ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber, + uint8_t* BlockBuffer, + const bool Read) +{ + uint16_t FileStartBlock = DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock + (*EEPROMFileStartCluster - 2) * SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER; + uint16_t FileEndBlock = FileStartBlock + (FILE_SECTORS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) - 1); + + /* Range check the write request - abort if requested block is not within the + * virtual firmware file sector range */ + if (!((BlockNumber >= FileStartBlock) && (BlockNumber <= FileEndBlock))) + return; + + uint16_t EEPROMAddress = (uint16_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; + + if (Read) + { + /* Read out the mapped block of data from the device's EEPROM */ + for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++) + BlockBuffer[i] = ReadEEPROMByte((uint8_t*)EEPROMAddress++); + } + else + { + /* Write out the mapped block of data to the device's EEPROM */ + for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++) + WriteEEPROMByte((uint8_t*)EEPROMAddress++, BlockBuffer[i]); + } +} + +/** Writes a block of data to the virtual FAT filesystem, from the USB Mass + * Storage interface. + * + * \param[in] BlockNumber Index of the block to write. + */ +void VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) +{ + uint8_t BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES]; + + /* Buffer the entire block to be written from the host */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(BlockBuffer, sizeof(BlockBuffer), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + switch (BlockNumber) + { + case DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock: + case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1: + case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2: + /* Ignore writes to the boot and FAT blocks */ + + break; + + case DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock: + /* Copy over the updated directory entries */ + memcpy(FirmwareFileEntries, BlockBuffer, sizeof(FirmwareFileEntries)); + + break; + + default: + ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, false); + ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, false); + + break; + } +} + +/** Reads a block of data from the virtual FAT filesystem, and sends it to the + * host via the USB Mass Storage interface. + * + * \param[in] BlockNumber Index of the block to read. + */ +void VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) +{ + uint8_t BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES]; + memset(BlockBuffer, 0x00, sizeof(BlockBuffer)); + + switch (BlockNumber) + { + case DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock: + memcpy(BlockBuffer, &BootBlock, sizeof(FATBootBlock_t)); + + /* Add the magic signature to the end of the block */ + BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES - 2] = 0x55; + BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES - 1] = 0xAA; + + break; + + case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1: + case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2: + /* Cluster 0: Media type/Reserved */ + UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(BlockBuffer, 0, 0xF00 | BootBlock.MediaDescriptor); + + /* Cluster 1: Reserved */ + UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(BlockBuffer, 1, 0xFFF); + + /* Cluster 2 onwards: Cluster chain of FLASH.BIN */ + UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(BlockBuffer, *FLASHFileStartCluster, FILE_CLUSTERS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES)); + + /* Cluster 2+n onwards: Cluster chain of EEPROM.BIN */ + UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(BlockBuffer, *EEPROMFileStartCluster, FILE_CLUSTERS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES)); + + break; + + case DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock: + memcpy(BlockBuffer, FirmwareFileEntries, sizeof(FirmwareFileEntries)); + + break; + + default: + ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, true); + ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, true); + + break; + } + + /* Write the entire read block Buffer to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(BlockBuffer, sizeof(BlockBuffer), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea80eae4d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h @@ -0,0 +1,302 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _VIRTUALFAT_H_ +#define _VIRTUALFAT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../BootloaderAPI.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Size of the virtual FLASH.BIN file in bytes. */ + #define FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES (FLASHEND - (FLASHEND - BOOT_START_ADDR) - AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE) + + /** Size of the virtual EEPROM.BIN file in bytes. */ + #define EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES E2END + + /** Number of sectors that comprise a single logical disk cluster. */ + #define SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER 4 + + /** Size of a single logical sector on the disk. */ + #define SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES 512 + + /** Size of a logical cluster on the disk, in bytes */ + #define CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES (SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES) + + /** Number of sectors required to store a given size in bytes. + * + * \param[in] size Size of the data that needs to be stored + * + * \return Number of sectors required to store the given data on the disk. + */ + #define FILE_SECTORS(size) ((size / SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES) + ((size % SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES) ? 1 : 0)) + + /** Number of clusters required to store a given size in bytes. + * + * \param[in] size Size of the data that needs to be stored + * + * \return Number of clusters required to store the given data on the disk. + */ + #define FILE_CLUSTERS(size) ((size / CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES) + ((size % CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES) ? 1 : 0)) + + /** Total number of logical sectors/blocks on the disk. */ + #define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS (FILE_SECTORS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) + FILE_SECTORS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) + 32) + + /** Converts a given time in HH:MM:SS format to a FAT filesystem time. + * + * \note The minimum seconds resolution of FAT is 2, thus odd seconds + * will be truncated to the previous integer multiple of 2 seconds. + * + * \param[in] hh Hours (0-23) + * \param[in] mm Minutes (0-59) + * \param[in] ss Seconds (0-59) + * + * \return Given time encoded as a FAT filesystem timestamp + */ + #define FAT_TIME(hh, mm, ss) ((hh << 11) | (mm << 5) | (ss >> 1)) + + /** Converts a given date in DD/MM/YYYY format to a FAT filesystem date. + * + * \param[in] dd Days in the month (1-31) + * \param[in] mm Months in the year (1-12) + * \param[in] yyyy Year (1980 - 2107) + * + * \return Given date encoded as a FAT filesystem datestamp + */ + #define FAT_DATE(dd, mm, yyyy) (((yyyy - 1980) << 9) | (mm << 5) | (dd << 0)) + + /** Bit-rotates a given 8-bit value once to the right. + * + * \param[in] x Value to rotate right once + * + * \return Bit-rotated input value, rotated once to the right. + */ + #define ROT8(x) ((((x) & 0xFE) >> 1) | (((x) & 1) ? 0x80 : 0x00)) + + /** Computes the LFN entry checksum of a MSDOS 8.3 format file entry, + * to associate a LFN entry with its short file entry. + * + * \param[in] n0 MSDOS Filename character 1 + * \param[in] n1 MSDOS Filename character 2 + * \param[in] n2 MSDOS Filename character 3 + * \param[in] n3 MSDOS Filename character 4 + * \param[in] n4 MSDOS Filename character 5 + * \param[in] n5 MSDOS Filename character 6 + * \param[in] n6 MSDOS Filename character 7 + * \param[in] n7 MSDOS Filename character 8 + * \param[in] e0 MSDOS Extension character 1 + * \param[in] e1 MSDOS Extension character 2 + * \param[in] e2 MSDOS Extension character 3 + * + * \return LFN checksum of the given MSDOS 8.3 filename. + */ + #define FAT_CHECKSUM(n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n7, e0, e1, e2) \ + (uint8_t)(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(n0)+n1)+n2)+n3)+n4)+n5)+n6)+n7)+e0)+e1)+e2) + + /** \name FAT Filesystem Flags */ + //@{ + /** FAT attribute flag to indicate a read-only file. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_READONLY (1 << 0) + + /** FAT attribute flag to indicate a hidden file. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_HIDDEN (1 << 1) + + /** FAT attribute flag to indicate a system file. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_SYSTEM (1 << 2) + + /** FAT attribute flag to indicate a Volume name entry. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_VOLUME_NAME (1 << 3) + + /** FAT attribute flag to indicate a directory entry. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_DIRECTORY (1 << 4) + + /** FAT attribute flag to indicate a file ready for archiving. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_ARCHIVE (1 << 5) + + /** FAT pseudo-attribute flag to indicate a Long File Name entry. */ + #define FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME 0x0F + + /** Ordinal flag marker for FAT Long File Name entries to mark the last entry. */ + #define FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY (1 << 6) + //@} + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the Root FAT file entry indexes on the disk. This can be used + * to retrieve the current contents of a known directory entry. + */ + enum + { + /** Volume ID directory entry, giving the name of the virtual disk. */ + DISK_FILE_ENTRY_VolumeID = 0, + /** Long File Name FAT file entry of the virtual FLASH.BIN image file. */ + DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_LFN = 1, + /** Legacy MSDOS FAT file entry of the virtual FLASH.BIN image file. */ + DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS = 2, + /** Long File Name FAT file entry of the virtual EEPROM.BIN image file. */ + DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_LFN = 3, + /** Legacy MSDOS FAT file entry of the virtual EEPROM.BIN image file. */ + DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS = 4, + }; + + /** Enum for the physical disk blocks of the virtual disk. */ + enum + { + /** Boot sector disk block. */ + DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock = 0, + /** First copy of the FAT table block. */ + DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1 = 1, + /** Second copy of the FAT table block. */ + DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2 = 2, + /** Root file and directory entries block. */ + DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock = 3, + /** Start block of the disk data section. */ + DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock = 4, + }; + + /* Type Definitions: */ + /** FAT boot block structure definition, used to identify the core + * parameters of a FAT file system stored on a disk. + * + * \note This definition is truncated to save space; the magic signature + * \c 0xAA55 must be appended to the very end of the block for it + * to be detected by the host as a valid boot block. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Bootstrap[3]; + uint8_t Description[8]; + uint16_t SectorSize; + uint8_t SectorsPerCluster; + uint16_t ReservedSectors; + uint8_t FATCopies; + uint16_t RootDirectoryEntries; + uint16_t TotalSectors16; + uint8_t MediaDescriptor; + uint16_t SectorsPerFAT; + uint16_t SectorsPerTrack; + uint16_t Heads; + uint32_t HiddenSectors; + uint32_t TotalSectors32; + uint16_t PhysicalDriveNum; + uint8_t ExtendedBootRecordSig; + uint32_t VolumeSerialNumber; + uint8_t VolumeLabel[11]; + uint8_t FilesystemIdentifier[8]; + /* uint8_t BootstrapProgram[448]; */ + /* uint16_t MagicSignature; */ + } FATBootBlock_t; + + /** FAT directory entry structure, for the various kinds of File and + * directory descriptors on a FAT disk. + */ + typedef union + { + /** VFAT Long File Name file entry. */ + struct + { + uint8_t Ordinal; + uint16_t Unicode1; + uint16_t Unicode2; + uint16_t Unicode3; + uint16_t Unicode4; + uint16_t Unicode5; + uint8_t Attribute; + uint8_t Reserved1; + uint8_t Checksum; + uint16_t Unicode6; + uint16_t Unicode7; + uint16_t Unicode8; + uint16_t Unicode9; + uint16_t Unicode10; + uint16_t Unicode11; + uint16_t Reserved2; + uint16_t Unicode12; + uint16_t Unicode13; + } VFAT_LongFileName; + + /** Legacy FAT MSDOS 8.3 file entry. */ + struct + { + uint8_t Filename[8]; + uint8_t Extension[3]; + uint8_t Attributes; + uint8_t Reserved[10]; + uint16_t CreationTime; + uint16_t CreationDate; + uint16_t StartingCluster; + uint32_t FileSizeBytes; + } MSDOS_File; + + /** Legacy FAT MSDOS (sub-)directory entry. */ + struct + { + uint8_t Name[11]; + uint8_t Attributes; + uint8_t Reserved[10]; + uint16_t CreationTime; + uint16_t CreationDate; + uint16_t StartingCluster; + uint32_t Reserved2; + } MSDOS_Directory; + } FATDirectoryEntry_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_VIRTUAL_FAT_C) + static uint8_t ReadEEPROMByte(const uint8_t* const Address) ATTR_NO_INLINE; + + static void WriteEEPROMByte(uint8_t* const Address, + const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NO_INLINE; + + static void UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(uint8_t* const FATTable, + const uint16_t Index, + const uint16_t ChainEntry) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + static void UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(uint8_t* const FATTable, + const uint16_t StartIndex, + const uint8_t ChainLength) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + static void ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber, + uint8_t* BlockBuffer, + const bool Read) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + + static void ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber, + uint8_t* BlockBuffer, + const bool Read) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + #endif + + void VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + void VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) AUX_BOOT_SECTION; + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1d550d1e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 8KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.128_8" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_128kb_8kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1E000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1E000"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="0"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 8KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.64_8" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_64kb_8kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xE000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xE000"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="0"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot (2KB AUX) - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_32kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="2048"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux=0x6810"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux_trampoline=0x6800"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=Boot_AUX_Trampoline"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot (2KB AUX) - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_16kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="2048"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux=0x2810"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux_trampoline=0x2800"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=Boot_AUX_Trampoline"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage" caption="Mass Storage Bootloader">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Mass Storage Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device via binary BIN files copied to the virtual FAT12 file-system it creates when plugged into a host.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="."/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderMassStorage.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderMassStorage.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+ <build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="Lib"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/VirtualFAT.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/VirtualFAT.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderMassStorage.txt"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..795c6e81a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM \ + ATTR_NO_INIT + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f0ec82a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +#
+# LUFA Library
+# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+# www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+# LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU = at90usb1287
+ARCH = AVR8
+BOARD = USBKEY
+F_CPU = 8000000
+F_USB = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET = BootloaderMassStorage
+SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S Lib/SCSI.c Lib/VirtualFAT.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable, BootloaderAPI_JumpTable, 32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures, BootloaderAPI_Signatures, 8)
+
+# Check if the bootloader needs an AUX section, located before the real bootloader section to store some of the
+# bootloader code. This is required for 32KB and smaller devices, where the actual bootloader is 6KB but the maximum
+# bootloader section size is 4KB. The actual usable application space will be reduced by 6KB for these devices.
+ifeq ($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB),8)
+ CC_FLAGS += -DAUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE=0
+else
+ AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = (6 - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB))
+
+ CC_FLAGS += -DAUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE='($(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) * 1024)'
+ LD_FLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.boot_aux=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, (($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) + $(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 - 16))
+ LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .boot_aux_trampoline, Boot_AUX_Trampoline, ($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) + $(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024)
+endif
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2be156808 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Bootloader user application API functions. + */ + +#include "BootloaderAPI.h" + +void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_erase_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address) +{ + boot_page_write_safe(Address); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_rww_enable(); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word) +{ + boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_signature_byte_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address); +} + +uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void) +{ + return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS); +} + +void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits) +{ + boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2d9b4a18 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderAPI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address); + void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address); + uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void); + void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76f37bf49 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+ software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+ without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+ all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+ BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+ BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+ BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+ BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+ BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+ BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+ BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+ jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+ ret
+ BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+ ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+ rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+ .long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+ .word 0xDF20 ; Signature for the Printer class bootloader
+ .word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9021f998f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c @@ -0,0 +1,487 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Printer class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#include "BootloaderPrinter.h" + +/** LUFA Printer Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all Printer Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t TextOnly_Printer_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_Printer, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = PRINTER_IN_EPADDR, + .Size = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR, + .Size = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .IEEE1284String = + "MFG:Generic;" + "MDL:Generic_/_Text_Only;" + "CMD:1284.4;" + "CLS:PRINTER", + }, + }; + +/** Intel HEX parser state machine state information, to track the contents of + * a HEX file streamed in as a sequence of arbitrary bytes. + */ +struct +{ + /** Current HEX parser state machine state. */ + uint8_t ParserState; + /** Previously decoded numerical byte of data. */ + uint8_t PrevData; + /** Currently decoded numerical byte of data. */ + uint8_t Data; + /** Indicates if both bytes that correspond to a single decoded numerical + * byte of data (HEX encodes values in ASCII HEX, two characters per byte) + * have been read. + */ + bool ReadMSB; + /** Intel HEX record type of the current Intel HEX record. */ + uint8_t RecordType; + /** Numerical bytes of data remaining to be read in the current record. */ + uint8_t DataRem; + /** Checksum of the current record received so far. */ + uint8_t Checksum; + /** Starting address of the last addressed FLASH page. */ + uint32_t PageStartAddress; + /** Current 32-bit byte extended base address in FLASH being targeted. */ + uint32_t CurrBaseAddress; + /** Current 32-bit byte address in FLASH being targeted. */ + uint32_t CurrAddress; +} HEXParser; + +/** Indicates if there is data waiting to be written to a physical page of + * memory in FLASH. + */ +static bool PageDirty = false; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * started via a forced watchdog reset. + */ +static bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader + * will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held + * low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value + * \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start. + */ +uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT; + + +/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application + * start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid, + * this will force the user application to start via a software jump. + */ +void Application_Jump_Check(void) +{ + bool JumpToApplication = false; + + #if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO) + /* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTC |= (1 << 7); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0); + + /* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */ + PORTC &= ~(1 << 7); + #elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + /* Disable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_DISABLE(); + + /* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTF |= (1 << 4); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */ + JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0); + + /* Re-enable JTAG debugging */ + JTAG_ENABLE(); + #else + /* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */ + if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST) + { + /* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */ + if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF); + } + else + { + /* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application; + * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */ + if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY)) + JumpToApplication = true; + + /* Clear reset source */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + } + #endif + + /* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */ + bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF); + + /* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */ + if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid) + { + /* Turn off the watchdog */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */ + MagicBootKey = 0; + + // cppcheck-suppress constStatement + ((void (*)(void))0x0000)(); + } +} + +/** + * Converts a given input byte of data from an ASCII encoded HEX value to an integer value. + * + * \note Input HEX bytes are expected to be in uppercase only. + * + * \param[in] Byte ASCII byte of data to convert + * + * \return Integer converted value of the input ASCII encoded HEX byte of data, or -1 if the + * input is not valid ASCII encoded HEX. + */ +static int8_t HexToDecimal(const char Byte) +{ + if ((Byte >= 'A') && (Byte <= 'F')) + return (10 + (Byte - 'A')); + else if ((Byte >= '0') && (Byte <= '9')) + return (Byte - '0'); + + return -1; +} + +/** + * Flushes a partially written page of data to physical FLASH, if a page + * boundary has been crossed. + * + * \note If a page flush occurs the global HEX parser state is updated. + */ +static void FlushPageIfRequired(void) +{ + /* Abort if no data has been buffered for writing to the current page */ + if (!PageDirty) + return; + + /* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */ + uint32_t NewPageStartAddress = (HEXParser.CurrAddress & ~(SPM_PAGESIZE - 1)); + if (HEXParser.PageStartAddress != NewPageStartAddress) + { + boot_page_write(HEXParser.PageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + HEXParser.PageStartAddress = NewPageStartAddress; + + PageDirty = false; + } +} + +/** + * Parses an input Intel HEX formatted stream one character at a time, loading + * the data contents into the device's internal FLASH memory. + * + * \param[in] ReadCharacter Next input ASCII byte of data to parse + */ +static void ParseIntelHEXByte(const char ReadCharacter) +{ + /* Reset the line parser while waiting for a new line to start */ + if ((HEXParser.ParserState == HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE) || (ReadCharacter == ':')) + { + HEXParser.Checksum = 0; + HEXParser.CurrAddress = HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress; + HEXParser.ReadMSB = false; + + /* ASCII ':' indicates the start of a new HEX record */ + if (ReadCharacter == ':') + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT; + + return; + } + + /* Only allow ASCII HEX encoded digits, ignore all other characters */ + int8_t ReadCharacterDec = HexToDecimal(ReadCharacter); + if (ReadCharacterDec < 0) + return; + + /* Read and convert the next nibble of data from the current character */ + HEXParser.Data = (HEXParser.Data << 4) | ReadCharacterDec; + HEXParser.ReadMSB = !HEXParser.ReadMSB; + + /* Only process further when a full byte (two nibbles) have been read */ + if (HEXParser.ReadMSB) + return; + + /* Intel HEX checksum is for all fields except starting character and the + * checksum itself + */ + if (HEXParser.ParserState != HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM) + HEXParser.Checksum += HEXParser.Data; + + switch (HEXParser.ParserState) + { + case HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT: + HEXParser.DataRem = HEXParser.Data; + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH; + break; + + case HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH: + HEXParser.CurrAddress += ((uint16_t)HEXParser.Data << 8); + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW; + break; + + case HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW: + HEXParser.CurrAddress += HEXParser.Data; + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE; + break; + + case HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE: + HEXParser.RecordType = HEXParser.Data; + HEXParser.ParserState = (HEXParser.DataRem ? HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA : HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM); + break; + + case HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA: + /* Track the number of read data bytes in the record */ + HEXParser.DataRem--; + + /* Protect the bootloader against being written to */ + if (HEXParser.CurrAddress >= BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE; + PageDirty = false; + return; + } + + /* Wait for a machine word (two bytes) of data to be read */ + if (HEXParser.DataRem & 0x01) + { + HEXParser.PrevData = HEXParser.Data; + break; + } + + /* Convert the last two received data bytes into a 16-bit word */ + uint16_t NewDataWord = ((uint16_t)HEXParser.Data << 8) | HEXParser.PrevData; + + switch (HEXParser.RecordType) + { + case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_Data: + /* If we are writing to a new page, we need to erase it first */ + if (!(PageDirty)) + { + boot_page_erase(HEXParser.PageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + PageDirty = true; + } + + /* Fill the FLASH memory buffer with the new word of data */ + boot_page_fill(HEXParser.CurrAddress, NewDataWord); + HEXParser.CurrAddress += 2; + + /* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */ + FlushPageIfRequired(); + break; + + case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedSegmentAddress: + /* Extended address data - store the upper 12-bits of the new address */ + HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress = ((uint32_t)NewDataWord << 4); + break; + + case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedLinearAddress: + /* Extended address data - store the upper 16-bits of the new address */ + HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress = ((uint32_t)NewDataWord << 16); + break; + } + + if (!HEXParser.DataRem) + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM; + break; + + case HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM: + /* Verify checksum of the completed record */ + if (HEXParser.Data != ((~HEXParser.Checksum + 1) & 0xFF)) + break; + + /* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */ + FlushPageIfRequired(); + + /* If end of the HEX file reached, the bootloader should exit at next opportunity */ + if (HEXParser.RecordType == HEX_RECORD_TYPE_EndOfFile) + RunBootloader = false; + + break; + + default: + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE; + break; + } +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + while (RunBootloader) + { + uint8_t BytesReceived = PRNT_Device_BytesReceived(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface); + + if (BytesReceived) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + while (BytesReceived--) + { + int16_t ReceivedByte = PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface); + + /* Feed the next byte of data to the HEX parser */ + ParseIntelHEXByte(ReceivedByte); + } + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + } + + PRNT_Device_USBTask(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } + + /* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */ + USB_Detach(); + + /* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */ + MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY; + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +static void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */ + TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1); + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10)); +} + +/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */ +ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the Printer management task. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + /* Setup Printer Data Endpoints */ + ConfigSuccess &= PRNT_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface); + + /* Reset the HEX parser upon successful connection to a host */ + HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE; + + /* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + PRNT_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bc1a6879 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderPrinter.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__) + #error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY LEDS_LED2 + + /** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */ + #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY 0xDC42 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Intel HEX parser state machine states. */ + enum HEX_Parser_States_t + { + HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE, /**< Parser is waiting for a HEX Start of Line character. */ + HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT, /**< Parser is waiting for a record byte count. */ + HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH, /**< Parser is waiting for the MSB of a record address. */ + HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW, /**< Parser is waiting for the LSB of a record address. */ + HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE, /**< Parser is waiting for the record type. */ + HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA, /**< Parser is waiting for more data in the current record. */ + HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM, /**< Parser is waiting for the checksum of the current record. */ + }; + + /** Intel HEX record types, used to indicate the type of record contained in a line of a HEX file. */ + enum HEX_Record_Types_t + { + HEX_RECORD_TYPE_Data = 0, /**< Record contains loadable data. */ + HEX_RECORD_TYPE_EndOfFile = 1, /**< End of file record. */ + HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedSegmentAddress = 2, /**< Extended segment start record. */ + HEX_RECORD_TYPE_StartSegmentAddress = 3, /**< Normal segment start record. */ + HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedLinearAddress = 4, /**< Extended linear address start record. */ + HEX_RECORD_TYPE_StartLinearAddress = 5, /**< Linear address start record. */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + static void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9aa79686 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Printer Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Printer Class</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Printer Subclass</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF Printer Class Standard</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a Generic Text Only Printer device, capable of reading and parsing + * "printed" plain-text Intel HEX files to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit + * into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to + * edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the + * bootloader from the normal user application. + * + * \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader + * + * On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of + * the AVR is grounded when the device is reset. + * + * The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses: + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from + * the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the + * device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily. + * + * <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software + * jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set). + * + * For board specific exceptions to the above, see below. + * + * \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board + * Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the + * \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board + * Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the + * \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation + * + * This bootloader uses the Generic Text-Only printer drivers inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no + * additional drivers need to be supplied for correct operation. + * + * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application + * + * This bootloader is compatible with Notepad under Windows, and the command line \c lpr utility under Linux. + * + * \subsection SSec_Notepad Notepad (Windows) + * + * While most text applications under Windows will be compatible with the bootloader, the inbuilt Notepad utility + * is recommended as it will introduce minimal formatting changes to the output stream. To program with Notepad, + * open the target HEX file and print it to the Generic Text Only printer device the bootloader creates. + * + * \subsection SSec_LPR LPR (Linux) + * + * While the CUPS framework under Linux will enumerate the bootloader as a Generic Text-Only printer, many + * applications will refuse to print to the device due to the lack of rich formatting options available. As a result, + * under Linux HEX files must be printed via the low level \c lpr utility instead. + * + * \code + * cat Mouse.hex | lpr + * \endcode + * + * \section Sec_API User Application API + * + * Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader, + * allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data. + * + * By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the + * following layout: + * + * \code + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE 32 + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE) + * #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index) (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2) + * + * void (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4); + * uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5); + * void (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6); + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE 0xDCFB + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_SIGNATURE 0xDF20 + * + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8)) + * #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH 4 + * \endcode + * + * From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address + * \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader + * can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them + * to the value \c BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH + * memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START. + * + * \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map + * The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader. + * + * \verbatim + * +----------------------------+ 0x0000 + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | User Application | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE + * | | + * | Bootloader Application | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * | | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96 + * | API Table Trampolines | + * | (Not User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32 + * | Bootloader API Table | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8 + * | Bootloader ID Constants | + * | (User App. Accessible) | + * +----------------------------+ FLASHEND + * \endverbatim + * + * + * \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues: + * + * \par On Linux machines, new firmware fails to be sent to the device via CUPS. + * Only a limited subset of normal printer functionality is exposed via the + * bootloader, causing CUPS to reject print requests from applications that + * are unable to handle true plain-text printing. For best results, the low + * level \c lpr command should be used to print new firmware to the bootloader. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5aa0e765b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS + #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99625d605 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x206B, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .Printer_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_Printer, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass, + .SubClass = PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass, + .Protocol = PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .Printer_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = PRINTER_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .Printer_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Printer Bootloader"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = ManufacturerString.Header.Size; + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..adb0dddb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the Printer device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define PRINTER_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the Printer host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the Printer data endpoints. */ + #define PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Printer Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Printer_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Printer_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Printer_DataOutEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_Printer = 0, /**< Printer interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86a56911e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Printer Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_128kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Printer Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_64kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Printer Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_32kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Printer Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_16kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <project caption="Printer Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_8kb_4kb_">
+ <require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+ <config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>
+
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>
+ <build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer" caption="Printer Bootloader">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Printer Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device by "printing" new HEX files to the virtual Plain-Text printer it creates when plugged into a host.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="."/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderPrinter.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderPrinter.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+ <build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderPrinter.txt"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f96bb9b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Printer Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM \ + ATTR_NO_INIT + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c8582ca2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +#
+# LUFA Library
+# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+# www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+# LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU = at90usb1287
+ARCH = AVR8
+BOARD = USBKEY
+F_CPU = 8000000
+F_USB = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET = BootloaderPrinter
+SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable, BootloaderAPI_JumpTable, 32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures, BootloaderAPI_Signatures, 8)
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e030ad44a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all bootloaders. + +# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */) + +# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad +# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if +# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails. +ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10) + $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED) +endif + +# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory +ifeq ($(OBJDIR),) + # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build + ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),) + MAKECMDGOALS := clean all + .NOTPARALLEL: + endif + + # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build + ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),) + MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS) + .NOTPARALLEL: + endif +endif + +%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES) + @echo . > /dev/null + +$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES): + @$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS) + +.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES) |